Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 418

BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER

_____________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 00 01 ENG
rev.
use and maintenance
Bromma spreaders

 Bromma Conquip AB or it’s affiliated


 

1 INTRODUCTION

2 SPREADER DATA SHEET

3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER

4 TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE

5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

6 START-UP PROCEDURES

7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

8 SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE

9 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

10 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

11 FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS

12 APPENDICES

_________________________________________________________________________________

.01
Bromma Group Manual

BROMMA
spreaders

Operation Manual
BROMMA spreader





BROMMA CONQUIP AB 01 01 ENG


rev.
Bromma Group Manual
2 Spreader - Datasheet
Type EH5U
Art.nr: 1012408
Container Range 20’- 40’
Capacity

Operating Movements

Electrical Equipment

Hydraulic Equipment

Filter

Corrosion protection

BROMMA CONQUIP AB 02 01 ENG


rev..1
Bromma Group Manual

GENERAL

telescopic arms

Lifting lugs

TELESCOPIC SYSTEM

POSITIONING THE SPREADER

HYDRAULIC UNIT


  

MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET

TWISTLOCK

GUIDE ARMS (Flippers, if such are fitted)

Automatic flippers

Manual flippers

A specially designed slotted adapter fits fixed flippers to the end of beam

SERVICE PANEL (If such is fitted.)


  


The spreader structure is designed according to DIN 15018 and to the
following loading group which represents a container handling crane.

 HOISTING GROUP H2
 LOADING GROUP B4

LIFTING CASES

1. Most frequent load case

2. Exceptional load cases

a)

b)

 

Safety features

1.

2.

3.

4.

NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can
be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running
the twistlock.

5.

6.


 

In-plant testing
STRUCTURAL

FUNCTIONAL


 

Bromma Group Manual

See Appendix


 

Bromma Group Manual

Warnings

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT


INTO OPERATION.

The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the
correct use of the spreader.

Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for
any purposes outside what is described in the manual.

DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe
Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the
side frame of the spreader.

Safety precautions

1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized


personnel.

2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is
designed.

3. DO NOT change system settings and functions.

4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.

5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.

6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving
beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters.

7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is


on.

8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by


qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper
pressure adjustment.

9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It


could cause personnel injury or property damage.

  


 
10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components

11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily.

12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the
spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by
personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and
movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur

13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the
spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts.

14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation.

15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5°).

16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or


adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar.

17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.

18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden


or empty, by hand or by tagline.

19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many
prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could
cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container
and an obstruction (such as a building or another container).

20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the
spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates.

21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the


movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed
on crane-mounted spreader.

22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it
leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the
Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom.

23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled,
make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection
and earth cable.

  


 
WARNING!

the FLIPPER
ARMS move upwards to their starting position

essential
Bromma Group Manual

0-1-may 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip


ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476)

NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury!

1
NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage!

2
TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING

WARNING!
Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur!
Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious
injury may occur!

3
red when locked green when
unlocked.

4
5

TWISTLOCK (drg no 22606)

CYLINDER EAR (drg no 22606)

SPHERICAL BEARING (drg no 22606)

HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22607)

OIL FILTER (drg no 22607)

LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22606)

GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22619)


  

GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22606)

ALL ROLLER CHAINS (drg no 22606)

TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22606)

SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22619)

TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22606)

1.

2.


  

1002945
1002945 PWH 18.2.2005
- b / SC 23.1.2007
-
-

Item Quant Title Material / Article No. Dwg No. Art. No. Remarks
1 1 TWISTLOCK PIN 1000431 1000431
2 1 GUIDE BLOCK 1000430 1000430
3 1 SPHERICAL WASHER 41683 53968
4 1 TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY. 43653 43653 TYPE 1
5 1 TWISTLOCK KEY 1000434 1000434
6 1 NUT 1000432 1000432 (M39x4-6H)
7 1 SCREW A4 1000600 M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
8 2 SPACER RING 41731 54049
9 1 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER 74147 (CA 32/20-100/65)
10 1 BLOCKADING PIN 37704 37704 FZB
11 1 SPRING 70429 SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
12 1 NUT LOCK-KING A4 77891 M12, Art. No was 75055
13 2 WASHER NORD-LOCK A4 701440 M12, Art. No. was 75295
14 2 LOCK PIN 74044 R.R 3.0
15 2 GREASE FITTING 71328 R 1/8"
16 6 SWITCH ATTACH. STD. 74970 (SENSOR D=30)
17 3 SCREW A4 1000596 M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
18 1 SWITCH PAD h=10 1001482 1001482
19 4 SCREW A4 1000585 M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694
20 2 SCREW A4 1000587 M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
21 1 BLOCKADING PIECE 43654 43654 FZB
22 4 NUT A4 76460 LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
23 6 WASHER A4 77798 BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
24 3 BOLTING PLATE 48916 48916 FZB
25 6 WASHER NORD-LOCK A4 701433 M6, Art. No. was 75268
26 3 COVER PLATE DEP4 79850 FZB
27 1 SENSOR PLATE ASSY. LEFT 1002453 1002453 FZB
1002946
1002946 PWH 18.2.2005
- b / SC 23.1.2007
-
-

Item Quant Title Material / Article No. Dwg No. Art. No. Remarks
1 1 TWISTLOCK PIN 1000431 1000431
2 1 GUIDE BLOCK 1000430 1000430
3 1 SPHERICAL WASHER 41683 53968
4 1 TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY. 43653 57059 TYPE 2
5 1 TWISTLOCK KEY 1000434 1000434
6 1 NUT 1000432 1000432 (M39x4-6H)
7 1 SCREW A4 1000600 M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
8 2 SPACER RING 41731 54049
9 1 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER 74147 (CA 32/20-100/65)
10 1 BLOCKADING PIN 37704 37704 FZB
11 1 SPRING 70429 SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
12 1 NUT LOCK-KING A4 77891 M12, Art. No was 75055
13 2 WASHER NORD-LOCK A4 701440 M12, Art. No. was 75295
14 2 LOCK PIN 74044 R.R 3.0
15 2 GREASE FITTING 71328 R 1/8"
16 6 SWITCH ATTACH. STD. 74970 (SENSOR D=30)
17 3 SCREW A4 1000596 M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
18 1 SWITCH PAD h=10 1001482 1001482
19 4 SCREW A4 1000585 M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694
20 2 SCREW A4 1000587 M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
21 1 BLOCKADING PIECE 43654 43654 FZB
22 4 NUT A4 76460 LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
23 6 WASHER A4 77798 BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
24 3 BOLTING PLATE 48916 48916 FZB
25 6 WASHER NORD-LOCK A4 701433 M6, Art. No. was 75268
26 3 COVER PLATE DEP4 79850 FZB
27 1 SENSOR PLATE ASSY. RIGHT 1002454 1002454 FZB
RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER

Nut
EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS

Twistlock pin

EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS

CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical


supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent
personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch
or by disconnecting the power cable.

If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on
or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.

1 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE

Nut

Spherical
washer

Twistlock
pin

NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions
for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.

2
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
3
If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter
4
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
5
If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter
6
Only for floating twistlocks

2 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP

To replace the hydraulic pump

NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts
to run out of the drain hose.

SHOCK RELIEF VALVES,

3 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
Locking
ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN screws
(Drawing no. 38073)

Adjusting
nut

50
Cotter pin

Chain lock

REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN

4.

10.

4 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
REPLACING ROBALON PLATES

1.

Telescopic beam lower plates


1.

2.

Telescopic beam upper plates


1.

2.

3.

DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT

1.

2.

3.

4.

5 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
5.

6.

FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS)

1.

NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is
correctly positioned.

2.

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

6 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH

Sensors:
a) Sensor

b)

Sensor
plate

SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS

ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN

a)

b)

c) Landing
switch

d) Landing pin

7 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
e)
Twistlock
DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN nut
M6 nut
M6 screw

Guide
neck

Twistlock
MOUNTING housing
Twistlock
head

Distance between top of twistlock head


and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm

Checking the Float


1. Grab hold of the twistlock head.
2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners.
3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock
housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be
adjusted /lowered.
4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the
twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner. Twistlock nut
5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it
moves a lot, adjust it higher. Spherical
6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be washer
adjusted down.

Adjusting Key
1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut.
The distance between the top of twistlock head and the Twistlock pin
bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
3. Recheck the float of the twistlock.

Twistlock
8 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB
head
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Removing the Twistlock Cylinder

Split pin

Spacer
ring

Installing the Twistlock Cylinder


Cylinder

Removing Sensors

Signal
cable
Sensor connection
Installing Sensors

9 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
Checking the tower motor brake

Tower Crank
motor

Torque
wrench

10 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG


rev. x
Bromma Manual

Important tightening torques EH5/EH170


Tower and
main frame
331Nm
165Nm
331Nm

331Nm

331Nm

End beam
68Nm 6.5 Nm

40Nm

Telescopic motor Telescopic motor


EH5 / EH170 EH5U / EH170U

331Nm

40Nm

331Nm

7-1- Febr. 10 rev.01 Bromma Conquip


Bromma Manual

Limit switch box


EH5 / EH170
91Nm

Twistlock Twistlock
EH5 / EH170 EH5U / EH170U

100 Nm
95 Nm

91Nm

Flipper motor and gearbox


165Nm
after 200
test
cycles 331Nm

56Nm

103Nm
after 200
test cycles

Bromma Conquip 7-2- Febr. 10 rev.01


 

 




        


 
  
    
   
      
   

    


   
     



 


 








 
 

 




  


 

            
   
 
      
  
      
        
    
    
    
    
       
        
      


 

      


    

           
  
 
       

         


         
                 
  
             
     
           
  
   
     
     
     

             
         


    

 

       


            
 
      
                 
    
            
 
         
   
      


 



            
   
 
       
     
          
          
             
  
          
        
    
        
    
         
     
    
         
           

    

  

      


             

         
             


 
  

 

  
     

    
        
   
         
       

 

   
  
  

  


       




 



    

                                             
 
               
          
            
        
    
               
       
  
 
    
                  
         
       
 
    
             
     
     
             
        
    
            
    
   
     
  
             
     
      
      
               
        
    
    
           
       
   
 
           
  
 
   
    
 
                      
       
          
 
  
                
     
    
             
     
 
  
               
          
      



   
  
  


   
  
  



   
 
 

   
  
  
  
 

  
 



   
   
 



   
  
 


   
  
  


   
  


   
 
 


   
  
  


   
 




   
  
 

   
  
 


   
  
 

   
  
  



   
  


   
  
  


   
  



   
  
 

   
  
 


   
  
  


   
  
  


   
 


   
  
 




   
  
  
 


   
  
  

  
 
 

   
  
  

   
  
  


   
 
 

   
  
  

   
  
 

   
 
 

  
  
  


   
  
 



   
  
  




  
 
 





  
 




   
  
  

   
  
  


   
  
  


   
  
  



   
  
  
 

   
  
  
  

   
  
 
  
 


  
 

  
 






   
  
  
 
Bromma Group Manual

0-1-may 02 rev.00 Bromma Conquip


 

GENERAL ASSEMBLY
-
EH5U
       

     


     
       

   

          
   
  
 
 

  
 


   

  

       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
Bromma Group Manual

7.3.2.2 Spare parts list for Twistlock Floating ISO


1002945 Left
1002946 Right
Bromma Group Manual
Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS SP-POS DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS NOTE


       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
       
       


     
     
   

 



 



  
  
 
 




 
 


 
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AN OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
F/N Qty Name Rev Type Title Title2
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AN OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
A-A

B (2:1)

1018967
F/N Qty Name Title Title2
Cabinet X100

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
8.15 LED signal lamps
Application
Bromma telescopic spreaders can be equipped with LED
signal lamps to inform the crane driver and other personnel if
the sprader has landed, (white or yellow), is unlocked (green)
or has locked (red) on a container. For twinlift spreaders a
fourth lamp is used to indicate twinboxes down (blue). For
mobile harbour crane spreaders the fourth lamp indicates
- Low power consumption tower in mid position (yellow).

- No Phantom color effect Description


The Bromma LED lamp assy consists of an aluminum bottom
- Low maintenance plate and 1-4 LED lights. They are available in 24VDC or
110/230VDC versions. The 24VDC models are equipped
- Excellent durability with a M12 connector. The 110/230 models come with 10 m
connection cable with an open end. The LED Lamp assy also
includes attachment screws, washers and nuts (M8 FZB).

Available models
LED Colors voltage Art. No. Rec. cable
Green, red, yellow 24 VDC 1001399

Green, red, white 24 VDC 1001400


Green, red, yellow, blue 24 VDC 1001401

Green, red, white, blue 24 VDC 1001402


Blue 24 VDC 1001403

Green, red 24 VDC 1001404

Red, green, yellow 24 VDC 1001479


Green, red, white, yellow 24 VDC 1001883

Green, red, yellow 110/230VAC 1001405

Green, red, white 110/230VAC 1001406

Green, red, yellow, blue 110/230VAC 1001407

Green, red, white, blue 110/230VAC 1001408

Blue 110/230VAC 1001409


Green, red 110/230VAC 1001410

Red, green, yellow 110/230VAC 700919


Green, red, white, yellow 110/230VAC 1001884
Bromma Group Manual

Technical specifications
Model 24VDC 110/230VAC

Voltage range 21--30 VDC 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz


Power consumption per light aspect 3.2 W 2.5 W
Light intesity per light aspect (clear cupola) 40 cd 30 cd

Ambient air temperature from -40OC to +55OC


Relative humidity up to 98% at temperature up to +35OC
Salt mist conditions IEC 60068-2-11
Mechanical wibration 10-50 Hz with acceleration up to 10 g
Ingress protection IP68 (IEC 60529)
Material Cupola Hi tech polycarbonate Makrolon ®
Material Bottm plate 10 mm aluminum alloy powder coated (RAL9005)

Dimensions

Light
aspects A (mm) B (mm)

1 160 130
2 305 275
3 450 420
4 595 565

Spare parts
SP-POS PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

Warnings
CAUTION: LED light units are sources of bright light. Do
not stare directly into the beam from close distances and
observe all the warnings and guidelines in the instruction
manual. Bromma LED indicator panels are classified as
Class 2M LED devices according to the standard
IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001.
LED-PANEL MOUNT. DET.
-
STS 45
All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done by the Bromma e-commerce
website. To order the requested spare parts some important information must be
available.

The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3or the dataplate mounted on
main frame of the current spreader.
The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See Spare part list.

Registered User
To be able to log in at the Bromma e-commerce site you must be a registered user.
To become a registered user you have to fill in the Application Form on the Bromma
website. After a few days you will receive an User ID and a password by e-mail.

When you are a regitered user fill in your User ID and password at the fields on the
Bromma e-commerce website (www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the
instructions on the screen.

Search Function
If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if you have any other
problems finding valid part numbers you can use the search function on the website
or call your local Bromma dealer. The phone number is published on the website
at www.bromma.com

FOR SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL


DEALER

BROMMA CONQUIP
Bromma Group Manual

  


 

-

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
22 30 23 31 24 32 2 37

22 30 23 31 24 32 2 PE

1 1
:L1 :L1 :L2 :L2 :L3 :L3 :PE :PE 1 3 5 1 3 5
2A 2 2

2 4 6 2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5

/10.04 2 4 6 /10.05 2 4 6 /10.01 2 4 6 /10.02 2 4 6


1 3 5

/7.01 2 4 6

7 8 9 21 :1 :2 :3 :PE

/6.01 / -Phase L1
/6.01 / -Phase L2
/6.01 / -Phase L3
7 8 9 21 1 2 3 PE

:7 :8 :9 :PE

1 2 3 PE

U U
3 3

2 2
PE -BRAKE2 PE -BRAKE1

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
4 5 1 2 PE

4 5 -WXP2
PE

BLUE

/5.01 / -Phase L3
BROWN

/5.01 / -Phase L2

/5.01 / -Phase L1

:101 :103 :102 :104


1 3 5

/10.03 2 4 6

14 12 24 22
1 3 5 1 3 5
/7.07 /7.07
11 21

2 4 6 2 4 6

L
1 2 3 22 4 5 6 20 PE

1 2 3 22 4 5 6 20 PE

:1 :2 :3 :PE :4 :5 :6 :PE :PE

1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE

U U

PE PE

Cabinet heater

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
25 1 3

25 1 3

:107 :105 :108 :106

13

/5.01 14

1 3
:N
10A 2 4

:N -N.VAC / /13.00

21 :L -L.VAC / /12.00
22
:L

PE
BN YL/GL BU

A1

A2 A2

A1
RD RD BK BK
-24VDC SCS² / /15.00

-24VDC / /9.00

-0VDC / /10.00
11

.01 12

:2 7 8
.01
:1
:3 :- :- :- :- :- :- :-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14
11
1 2 12
24
3 4 21
22
5 6
7 8

/14.00 / -Spreader stop


/8.08 / -XP21:1
/8.08 / -XP21:2
/8.09 / -XP21:3
/8.09 / -XP21:4
/8.09 / -XP21:5
/8.07 / -XP21:6
/8.07 / -XP21:7
/8.08 / -XP21:8
/8.08 / -XP21:9
/8.08 / -XP21:10

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
red -+VBB X2 / /17.09
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
:1

blue -GND X2 / /17.09


:8

/15.06 / -CAN high X1 White white -Can high X2 / /16.09


:15

/15.06 / -CAN low X1 Brown brown -Can low X2 / /16.09


:22

red -+VBB X3 / /19.09


:2

SIGN.

blue -GND X3 / /19.09


:9

white -Can high X3 / /18.09


DATE
:16

brown -Can low X3 / /18.09


:23
:3
:10
:17

consent of the owner.


:24

The design an or constructions


This drawing is copyright, and is

or reproduced, whitout the written


:4

contained therein, may not be copied


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
:11
:18
:25

red -+VBB X8 / /21.09


:5

blue -GND X8 / /21.09


:12

white -Can high X8 / /20.09


:19

brown -Can low X8 / /20.09


:26

red -+VBB X10 / /23.09


:6

blue -GND X10 / /23.09


:13

white -Can high X10 / /22.09


:20
:27 brown -Can low X10 / /22.09
red -VBB X13 / /25.09

:7
blue -GND X13 / /25.09

:14
white -Can high X13 / /24.09

:
:
:21
brown -Can low X13 / /24.09

:28
/7.06 / -XP21:6

6
/7.06 / -XP21:7

7
/7.06 / -XP21:8

8
/7.06 / -XP21:9

9
/7.06 / -XP21:10

10
/7.04 / -XP21:1

1
/7.04 / -XP21:2

2
-0VDC / +X1/9.00
/7.05 / -XP21:3

3
/7.05 / -XP21:4

4
/7.05 / -XP21:5

5
COMMON GROUP 1 COMMON GROUP 2

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44
:44 :31 :41 :43 :42 :21 :3 :2 :11 :1

/7.08 / -24VDC -24VDC / /10.00

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

+X1/8.08 / -0VDC

:13 :14 :15 :16 :17 :18 :19 :16

1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 3 COMMON GROUP 4

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44
:8 :26 :16 :6 :7 :35 :4 :5 :25 :15

/9.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / /11.00

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

/7.08 / -0VDC -0VDC / /11.00

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 5 COMMON GROUP 6

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 9
PIN NO: 50
:9 :10 :20 :30 :40 :50 :46 :47 :49 :48

/10.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / /14.00

/10.09 / -0VDC -0VDC / /14.00

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 7 COMMON GROUP 8

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 43

PIN NO: 11
:11 :21 :31 :41 :42 :43 :24 :35 :44 :45

/7.08 / -L.VAC

:109 :110 :111 :112 :113 :114 :115 :116

7 8 35 20 21 34 36

7 8 35 20 21 34 36

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
19 18 13 9 10 12 11

19 18 13 9 10 12 11

:117 :118 :119 :120 :121 :122 :123 :124

/7.08 / -N.VAC -N.VAC / /14.00

:1 :5 :4 :3 :2 :15 :6 :16 :25 :26

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 1
PIN NO: 15

COMMON GROUP 9 COMMON GROUP 10

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
14 15 16 17

14 15 16 17

:125 :126 :127 :128

/11.09 / -24VDC

/7.00 / -Spreader stop GRAV.POINT


13
AUT. RETURN
OFF ON
14

/11.09 / -0VDC -0VDC / /15.00

/13.08 / -N.VAC

:36 :49 :48 :47 :46 :8 :7 :10 :9 :40 :50 :30 :20

O O O O O O O O
PIN NO: 8

PIN NO: 36
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 20

COMMON GROUP 11

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
-CAN high X1 / /8.01
-CAN low X1 / /8.01
:129 :130

2 3

white brown

/14.09 / -0VDC

/7.08 / -24VDC SCS²

WH
WH;BN
BN;GN
GN
RED

BLUE

BLACK
GREEN

6 16 26 36

:42 :43 :44 :45 :10 :9 :19 :29 :39 :49 :30 :40 :50 :20 :48 :6 :16 :26 :36
SD
SC

ID0
ID1
ID3
ID4
ID5
VCC

GND
GND
GND
GND

+24V
+24V
B-Can L

B-Can H
Can-GND

Can-open L

Can-open H

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
- - - - - -

4 4 4 4 4 4
-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01
-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01

4 2 4 4

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :1 :2
/17.00

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
O O O O O O O O
/16.00
GND
+VBB

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :3 :5

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
+X1/8.01 / -GND X2
+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
- - - - - -

4 4 4 4 4 4
-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02
-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02

4 2 4 4

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :1 :2
/19.00

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
O O O O O O O O
/18.00
GND
+VBB

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :3 :5

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
+X1/8.02 / -GND X3
+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
- - - - - - - -

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05
-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :1 :2
/21.00

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
O O O O O O O O
/20.00
GND
+VBB

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :3 :5
+X1/8.05 / -GND X8
+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1 3 1 3
- -

4 4
-Can high X10 / +X1/8.06
-Can low X10 / +X1/8.06

4 4

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :1 :2
/23.00

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
O O O O O O O O
/22.00
GND
+VBB

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :3 :5
+X1/8.06 / -GND X10
+X1/8.05 / -+VBB X10

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
- - - - - - -

4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-Can high X13 / +X1/8.07
-Can low X13 / +X1/8.07

4 2 4 2 4 4 2

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :1 :2
/25.00

O O O O O O O O
CAN_high
CAN_low

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
O O O O O O O O
/24.00
GND
+VBB

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 :3 :5
+X1/8.06 / -VBB X13

+X1/8.07 / -GND X13

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
K2 Telescope Twl
-HL1 Not Locked
Gravity point retract / to 20´ lock
Unlocked left connected signal
to left CMD CMD
K3 Telescope Twl
-HL2 Not Unlocked
Gravity point to 30' unlock
Locked left connected signal
to right CMD CMD
K6 Telescope G.p.
-HL3 Not Spreader landed
Hydralic pump expand / to40´ move to left
Landed left connected signal
left/right gable CMD CMD
K8 Flippers G.p.
-HL4 Not G.p. in centre
Retract all up move to right
Tower in center left connected signal
telescope CMD CMD
K9 Flipper
-HL5 Container G.p. to left Not
Extend waterside down
Unlocked right Counter signal connected
telescope CMD
Flipper
-HL6 Not Not G.p. to right Not
right down
Locked right connected connected signal connected
CMD
Flipper
-HL7 Not Not H.I.S Spreader
left down
Landed right connected connected signal (option) stop
CMD
Flipper
Not Not Not TTDS ok G.p.
landside down
connected connected connected signal (option) auto return
CMD

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
Rubber boot

X1 /6.02 /6.04 /5.04 /5.07


/11.05
/10.04 /10.01
/10.03

30x90x115mm
-K6
-QM6 -QM7 -K8 -QM8 -K2 -P2
-QM1

-F1 2A /5.09
/7.02 /7.01
/7.07

30x90x380mm
10A
-F2

-KA1
-K1
X2

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
X1

XP21

XP22
XP23
CABINET
X100

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
2 3

1 4

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
X0 -BRAKE1 =A1+X1/5.08 79125 CURRENT RELAY SR15 SEW SEW SR15 8267626 BSR 150-500VAC M25

X0 -BRAKE1 =A1+X1/5.08 700026 GLAND ADAPTER LAPP MILTRONIC AB 12 67 42 12 67 42 SKINDICHT M32/M25

X0 -BRAKE2 =A1+X1/5.04 700026 GLAND ADAPTER LAPP MILTRONIC AB 12 67 42 12 67 42 SKINDICHT M32/M25

X0 -BRAKE2 =A1+X1/5.04 79125 CURRENT RELAY SR15 SEW SEW SR15 8267626 BSR 150-500VAC M25

X0 -CABINET_X100 =A1+X1/6.04 1018972 CABINET X100 CANopen Bromma 1018972 1018972 Mobile Spreader 10 fuse

X0 -CABINET_X100 =A1+X1/6.04 700563 GLAND PLUG M16 MILTRONIC MILTRONIC SKINDICHT-BL-M16 12 12 31 M16

X0 -HINK_X0 =A1+X1/6.03 1002490 X1 cabinet EH5 ASSY BROMMA 1002490 Complete with SCS² for CAN open

X0 -HINK_X0 =A1+X1/6.03 1002607 CABLE AND ITEM MARKING FLEXIMARK MILTRONIC TOWER JIB

X0 -HINK_X0 =A1+X1/6.03 1002595 CABLE AND ITEM MARKING FLEXIMARK MILTRONIC END BEAM 3-FLIPPER

X0 -HINK_X0 =A1+X1/6.03 1002018 PROTECTION COVER HTS ABB ABB 5DLN296350-A 5DLN296350-A SIZE4

X0 -R2 =A1+X0/16.09 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83

X0 -R3 =A1+X0/18.09 1002390 RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W Elfa Elfa 60-103-83 60-103-83

X0 -S1 =A1+X0/16.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S2 =A1+X0/16.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S3 =A1+X0/18.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S4 =A1+X0/18.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S5 =A1+X0/16.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S6 =A1+X0/16.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S7 =A1+X0/18.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S8 =A1+X0/18.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S9 =A1+X0/16.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S10 =A1+X0/16.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S11 =A1+X0/18.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S12 =A1+X0/18.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S13 =A1+X0/20.05 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S14 =A1+X0/20.07 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S16 =A1+X0/20.06 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S52 =A1+X0/20.03 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S53 =A1+X0/20.04 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S54 =A1+X0/20.01 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S55 =A1+X0/20.02 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -S114 =A1+X0/20.08 1002367 PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM IFM II5910 IIA3015BBPKG/US M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0 -X2 =A1+X0/16.00 1001762 IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic CR9011 CR9011 8 in / 8 out

X0 -X3 =A1+X0/18.00 1001762 IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic CR9011 CR9011 8 in / 8 out

X0 -X8 =A1+X0/20.00 79282 GLAND PLUG MURR MILTRONIC AB ZVKM12 40 57 05 ASB BOX PLUGS M12

X0 -X8 =A1+X0/20.00 1001762 IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic CR9011 CR9011 8 in / 8 out

X0 -XP1 74410 INSERT 37P (M) ODU ODU GUNNAR PETTERSON AB 309 803 150 037 151 309 803 150 037 151 ODU 309 37 POL MALE

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
X0 -XP1 75618 SHRINK HOUSE 85/25 NELCO CONTACT NELCO CONTACT MWTM-85/25-1000/172

X0 -XP1 73983 CRIMPING HOSE NELCO

X0 -XP1 73523 PLUG ODU 309 ODU GUNNAR PETTERSON AB 309.020.000.554.000 309.020.000.554.000 ODU 309 BAJONETT BRONCE PG42

X0 -XP1 73272 GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm LAPP MILTRONIC AB SKINDICHT-SR 42/35 12 02 35

X0 -XP2 76576 SOCKET HNA TYPE 215 KARL DOSE KARL DOSE GmbH INSATS 162 MED HYLSA LÅNG 3121501

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
1002656
. BLN 2.7.2004
.
.
.

Item Quant Title Specification Dwg/PDF No. Art. No. Remarks


1 13 Input module 1001747
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
:L1 :L1 :L2 :L2 :L3 :L3 :PE :PE

1 1
1 3 5 1 3 5
2A 2 2

2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

/5.01 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6
/7.04 2 4 6 /7.05 2 4 6 /7.01 2 4 6 /7.02 2 4 6

PE 20 21 22 7 8 9 :1 :2 :3

/4.00 / -Phase L1
/4.00 / -Phase L2
/4.00 / -Phase L3
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
:101 :103 :102 :104
/3.01 / -Phase L3

/3.01 / -Phase L2

/3.01 / -Phase L1

14 12 24 22

/5.07 /5.07
11 21

1 3 5
/7.03 2 4 6

1 3 5 1 3 5
N

2 4 6 2 4 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
:107 :105 :108 :106

13

/3.01 14

1 3
:N
10A 2 4

:N -N.VAC / /10.00

21 :L -L.VAC / /9.00
22
:L

PE
BN YL/GL BU

A1

A2 A2

A1
RD RD BK BK
-24VDC SCS² / /12.00

-24VDC / /6.00

-0VDC / /7.00
11

.01 12

:2 7 8
.01
:1
:3 :- :- :- :- :- :- :-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14
11
1 2 12
24
3 4 21
22
5 6
7 8

/11.00 / -Spreader stop


This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 1 COMMON GROUP 2

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44
:44 :31 :41 :43 :42 :21 :3 :2 :11 :1

/5.08 / -24VDC -24VDC / /7.00

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 3 COMMON GROUP 4

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44
:8 :26 :16 :6 :7 :35 :4 :5 :25 :15

/6.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / /8.00

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

/5.08 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /8.00

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 5 COMMON GROUP 2
6

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 9
PIN NO: 50
:9 :10 :20 :30 :40 :50 :46 :47 :49 :48

/7.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / /11.00

/7.09 / -0VDC -0VDC / /11.00

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
COMMON GROUP 7 COMMON GROUP 8

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 43

PIN NO: 11
:11 :21 :31 :41 :42 :43 :24 :35 :44 :45

/5.08 / -L.VAC

:109 :110 :111 :112 :113 :114 :115 :116

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
:117 :118 :119 :120 :121 :122 :123 :124

/5.08 / -N.VAC -N.VAC / /11.00

:1 :5 :4 :3 :2 :15 :6 :16 :25 :26

O O O O O O O O

PIN NO: 1
PIN NO: 15

COMMON GROUP 9 COMMON GROUP 10

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
:125 :126 :127 :128

/8.09 / -24VDC

/5.00 / -Spreader stop GRAV.POINT


13
AUT. RETURN
OFF ON
14

/8.09 / -0VDC -0VDC / /12.00

/10.08 / -N.VAC

:36 :49 :48 :47 :46 :8 :7 :10 :9 :40 :50 :30 :20

O O O O O O O O
PIN NO: 8

PIN NO: 36
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 20

COMMON GROUP 11

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
:129 :130

2 3

white brown

/11.09 / -0VDC

/5.08 / -24VDC SCS²

WH
WH;BN
BN;GN
GN
RED

BLUE

BLACK
GREEN

6 16 26 36

:42 :43 :44 :45 :10 :9 :19 :29 :39 :49 :30 :40 :50 :20 :48 :6 :16 :26 :36
SD
SC

ID0
ID1
ID3
ID4
ID5
VCC

GND
GND
GND
GND

+24V
+24V
B-Can L

B-Can H
Can-GND

Can-open L

Can-open H

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
Rubber boot

X1 /4.01 /4.03 /3.04 /3.07 /8.05


/7.04 /7.01
/7.03

30x90x115mm
-K6
-QM6 -QM7 -K8 -QM8 -K2 -P2
-QM1

-F1 2A /3.09
/5.02 /5.01
/5.07

30x90x380mm
10A
-F2

-KA1
-K1
X2

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
L1-L3

L
N
1-3
105-106

2-3
+

Blue

X1 X2

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
XP22 XP21 XP23

Contact No.1

Contact No.1

Guide Pin
Guide Pin

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
A

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
CE-label

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN. DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is
the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
K2 Telescope Twl
HL1 Not Locked
Gravity point retract to 20' lock
Unlocked left connected signal
to left CMD CMD
K3 Telescope Twl
HL2 Not Unlocked
Gravity point to 30' unlock
Locked left connected signal
to right CMD CMD
K6 Telescope G.p.
HL3 Not Spreader landed
Hydralic pump expand to 40' move to left
Landed left connected signal
left/right gable CMD CMD
K8 Flippers G.p.
HL4,8 Not G.p. in centre
Retract all up move to right
Tower in centre left/right connected signal
telescope CMD CMD
K9 Flipper
HL5 Container G.p. at left Not
Extend waterside down
Unlocked right Counter signal connected
telescope CMD
Flipper
HL6 Not Not G.p. at right Not
right down
Locked right connected connected signal connected
CMD
Flipper
HL7 Not Not H.I.S Spreader
left down
Landed right connected connected signal (option) stop
CMD
Flipper
Not Not Not TTDS ok G.p.
landside down
connected connected connected signal (option) auto return
CMD

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
X1 =A1+X1/12.07 38906 EEPROM CC-SYSTEM CC-SYSTEM LENGTH 850MM

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 700086 SCS² PLUG K2 AD-CONTACT AD-CONTAKT AB DRC 26-50-S08 DRC 26-50-S08

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 700087 SCS² PLUG K3 AD-CONTACT AD-CONTAKT AB DRC 26-50-S09 DRC 26-50-S09

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 38905 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² CC-SYSTEM CC-SYSTEM SEE DRAWING 38905

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 1002003 SCS² CONNECTOR COVER BMAL BMAL 1002003 Rubber boot for deutsch connectors

X1 -B1 80 =A1+X1/9.00 700079 SCS² SOCKET PIN AD-CONTACT AD-CONTAKT AB 0462-201-2031 AU 0462-201-2031 AU

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 700085 SCS² PLUG K1 AD-CONTACT AD-CONTAKT AB DRC 26-50-S07 DRC 26-50-S07

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 78601 INPUT MODULE DC OPTO22 ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB G4IDC5 G4 IDC 5 24 VDC

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 37524 SCS² PLC Bromma CC-System

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 700498 SCS I/O MARKING BROMMA BROMMA 700498 See document

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 39952 Attachment for SCS² in cabinet NPP/ Bromma 39952 39952 EH5-170-U

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 700020 SCS² SOFTWARE LICENS ENEA ENEA OSE SYSTEMS AB

X1 -B1 =A1+X1/9.00 1001750 OUTPUT MODULE 0-240VAC DELCON/AXIOM OEM-AUTOMATIC G4/SLO5TR G4/SLO5TR Sek:0-240VAC 3A

X1 -B1 80 =A1+X1/9.00 700080 SCS² DUMMY PIN AD-CONTACT AD-CONTAKT AB 0413-204-2005 0413-204-2005

X1 -B1 13 =A1+X1/9.00 78603 OUTPUT MODULE DC OPTO22 ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB G40DC5 G4 ODC 5 24VDC 4A

X1 -EH1 =A1+X1/4.07 1001690 HEATER CABINET STEGO OEM AUTOMATIC HG140 14001.0-01 30W 110-250V AC/DC

X1 -F1 =A1+X1/3.09 1001828 MCB 1-POL 2A SIEMENS SIEMENS 5SY6 102-7 C-CHARACTER

X1 -F2 =A1+X1/5.02 1001829 MCB 2-POL 10A SIEMENS SIEMENS 5SY6 210-7 C-CHARACTER

X1 -G1 =A1+X1/5.02 1001859 POWER SUPPLY 90-255VAC/ 24VDC PrimePower OEM-Automatic 0036515 0036515 30A / 0-400HZ

X1 -K1 =A1+X1/5.01 1001826 CONTACTOR SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RT13 25-1BB40 3RT13 25-1BB40 24VDC 22kW 4-pol SIZE 0

X1 -K2 =A1+X1/7.01 1001827 PHASEREVERSER SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4 3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4 24VDC 7,5kW 17A

X1 -K6 =A1+X1/7.03 1000763 CONTACTOR SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RT1025-1BB40 32 667 91 24VDC 7.5KW 17A

X1 -K8 =A1+X1/7.04 1001827 PHASEREVERSER SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4 3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4 24VDC 7,5kW 17A

X1 -KA1 =A1+X1/5.07 78980 RELAY SOCKET 2-SWITCHING RELECO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB 40 165 54 S7M

X1 -KA1 =A1+X1/5.07 78986 AUXILIARY CONTACTOR RELECO OEM C7 A20 D24D C7 A20 D24D 24VDC 2-SWITCHING

X1 -KEY1 =A1+X1/12.03 38905 IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS² CC-SYSTEM CC-SYSTEM SEE DRAWING 38905

X1 -P1 =A1+X1/3.09 70873 TIMECOUNTER 380 VAC BAUSER METRIC AB 632A.2 380VAC 24-0015-78

X1 -P2 =A1+X1/8.05 76140 PULSECOUNTER 190.07 24V DC BAUSER METRIC AB 632 A.2 24VDC 24-2032-25DC

X1 -Q1 =A1+X1/3.01 700869 LOCK HANDLE GREY 66X66mm BACO OEM 0174601 0174601

X1 -Q1 =A1+X1/3.01 700870 SEALING IP65 BACO OEM 0172267 0172267

X1 -Q1 =A1+X1/3.01 700871 AUXILIARY BLOCK BACO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB 0172179 172179 NO+NC 400V 10A SIGNALCONTACT

X1 -Q1 =A1+X1/3.01 700868 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BACO OEM 0172200 0172200 50A

X1 -QM1 =A1+X1/3.07 78993 THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RV10 21 - 4BA10 3RV1021-4BA10 7.5KW 14-20A

X1 -QM6 =A1+X1/4.01 79042 THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RV10 11-1GA10 3RV1011-1GA10 2.2kW 4.5-6.3 A

X1 -QM7 =A1+X1/4.03 79042 THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RV10 11-1GA10 3RV1011-1GA10 2.2kW 4.5-6.3 A

X1 -QM8 =A1+X1/3.04 79043 THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK SIEMENS SIEMENS 3RV10 11-1HA10 3RV1011-1HA10 3,0kW 5,5-8A

X1 -SB1 =A1+X1/11.08 1019811 AUXILIARY BLOCK BACO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB 230 E10 230E 10 switch body with 1NO block

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
X1 -SB1 =A1+X1/11.08 1019819 WHITE SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING) BACO OEM-IDEALGRAVYR AB LIB5 GRAVERING ENL BILAGA (Suitable with LWG3 - 1019818)

X1 -SB1 =A1+X1/11.08 1019832 SWITCH HEAD BACO OEM L21KA03 L21KA03 Only operating head 2 pos, 45º

X1 -SB1 =A1+X1/11.08 1019818 FRAME BACO OEM LWG3 (Suitable with LIB5 - 1019819)

X1 -SS1 =A1+X1/5.01 1019809 AUXILIARY BLOCK BACO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB 333E 02 333E 02 switch boddy with 2NC block

X1 -SS1 =A1+X1/5.01 1019818 FRAME BACO OEM LWG3 (Suitable with LIB5 - 1019819)

X1 -SS1 =A1+X1/5.01 1019810 PUSH BUTTON BLACK BACO OEM-AUTOMATIC AB L22 EC03 L22 EC03 FOR SPREADER STOP Ø29mm

X1 -SS1 =A1+X1/5.01 1019819 WHITE SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING) BACO OEM-IDEALGRAVYR AB LIB5 GRAVERING ENL BILAGA (Suitable with LWG3 - 1019818)

X1 -XP21 700858 INSERT FEMALE 10POLE HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS HE.10.BU.C 2-1103637-3 CRIMP

X1 -XP21 700863 GUIDE PIN HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS F-Sti-M3 1-1106102-1

X1 -XP21 700854 SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS HIP-K.10/24.AG 2-1102647-5 SCREW LOCK

X1 -XP21 10 700862 CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS 4-1105101-1 2,5mm2 AWG14

X1 -XP21 1002018 PROTCTION COVER ABB ABB 5DLN296350-A 5DLN296350-A HTS SIZE4

X1 -XP22 1001921 SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS HIP.3/4.AG 1-1102603-5 SCREW LOCK

X1 -XP22 1001926 CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS 1-1105051-1 0,14-0,37mm²

X1 -XP22 1001923 INSERT FEMALE 7+POLE HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS HN.D.7.Bu.C 2-1103103-3 CRIMP

X1 -XP22 1002520 PROTECTION COVER HTS ABB ABB 5DLN296350-C 5DLN296350-C SIZE1

X1 -XP23 700854 SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS HIP-K.10/24.AG 2-1102647-5 SCREW LOCK

X1 -XP23 700863 GUIDE PIN HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS F-Sti-M3 1-1106102-1

X1 -XP23 1002018 PROTCTION COVER ABB ABB 5DLN296350-A 5DLN296350-A HTS SIZE4

X1 -XP23 700856 INSERT FEMALE 42POLE HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS HN.2D.42.BU.C 2-1103206-3 CRIMP

X1 -XP23 24 1001927 CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE HTS TYCO ELECTRONICS 4-1105051-1 1,5mm²

X1 :1 =A1+X1/5.02 79367 FUSE ATTACHMENT WAGO HELLERMANN TYTON AB 282-696 282-696 Blade fuse terminal

X1 :1 =A1+X1/5.02 79371 FUSE 30A LITTELFUSE ELFA AB 33-051-82 Blade fuse 30A

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written :
consent of the owner.
:
1 REV 3
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4

General ............................................................................................................................ 4
The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5
Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5
Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6
CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7
I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7
Common junction........................................................................................................ 8
Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8
Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9
Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9
I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10

ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10


System view .............................................................................................................. 10
Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11
Component view ....................................................................................................... 11
Load view.................................................................................................................. 14

General .......................................................................................................................... 15
Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15
Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16

ABE............................................................................................................................... 18

General .......................................................................................................................... 20
BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21
Power connector........................................................................................................ 21
BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21
Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21
Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21

Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22


General ...................................................................................................................... 22
The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22
From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23

2 REV 3
Teach......................................................................................................................... 23

General ...................................................................................................................... 24
Hardware................................................................................................................... 24
Software .................................................................................................................... 25
Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26

3 REV 3
Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.

I/O LED Field RS232 Display &


X2- I/O, bus bus
X1- I/O 1-48 (X5) Power
& supply X3- I/O
Connector LEDS
Connector Connector

General
Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with
one input and the other with one output.

4 REV 3
The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility
of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is
easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw
there is a number 7, 8 or 9.
connection
The X2 key
should be
marked “8”

Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins
9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10)
correspond to and pins left unconnected are correspond to . A master
node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader
Node)
A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together.
Start with making “ID” jumpers.

And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.

5 REV 3
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector
due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The
potential is measured between the A section and the B section.

24INA X2/42 Potential 1


24INA X2/43
24INB X2/45 Potential 2
24INB X2/44

CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector.
All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and
CAN Low to be able to establish communication.

CAN High X2/30


CAN Low X2/40

Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id,
CAN bus and power supply connected.

+
24V Supply
-
Low
C AN Bus High

ID

9 10 19 29 30 40 42 43 44 45 49 10 19 29 30 39 40 42 43 44 45 49

Pin no.

CAN-bus

24V SUPPLY

6 REV 3
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)
Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them
in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number “7” on the front of the
connector, and the X3 connector by the number “9”.
connection
key

I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an
output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups.
I/O 45 to 48 are single I/O’s. Each group has a “Common” junction. This makes it
possible to have different voltages in each group.

I/O-9 General purpose input or output 26


I/O-10 General purpose input or output 16
I/O-11 General purpose input or output 6
I/O-12 General purpose input or output 7
Common/Supply 3 Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 8

I/O-48 General purpose input or output 30


Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48 20

7 REV 3
Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for
inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can
be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.

L/24V D C
N / 0V D C

SCS SCS
9 10 11 12 9 10
S C S 11 12

8 26 16 6 7 8 26 16 6 7

In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group
is used as outputs.

Internal jumper bars


To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups
of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The
following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves
with common potential.

Pin number Link Pin number Link


configuration configuration
12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
(Only in X1) 24 29
32 37
33 39
34 38
(Only in X1) 45 (Only in X1) 36

8 REV 3
Connecting a switch

Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1.
One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is
connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.

L/24V Supply
N/0V Supply

6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27

11 12
10 9

Connecting a valve

Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1.
One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the
other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.

L/24V Supply
N/0V Supply

6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27

11 12 10 9

9 REV 3
I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state
interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage
range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output
modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS² cover. The
cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside.

LED

FUSE

ABE (Application Builder Environment)


System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is
the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the
software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and
these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some
properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.

In the system view we have to activate


the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is
the master and is active per default.

System properties
Menu tabs

10 REV 3
Pin configuration
Next menu tab is “pin configuration”, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1)
Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name ”switch”.
(2) Comment field is optional. (3)

Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name
”VALVE”. (2)

The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any
of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use “_”.
A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.

Component view
Next menu tab is the “component view”
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette
displaying all components is available in the view.
The palette can be made visible
by pressing “components” if it is
not already visible.

Available
component
pallet

11 REV 3
Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet
(1). It’s located in the Digital tab (2).

Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the
right button to get the arrow back.

Right click the mouse on


the left red dot and work
your way to the input
”SWITCH” and left click.

Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case “VALVE”

12 REV 3
Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select “properties”.

Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal
component address and should not be changed. When ready press “OK”.

Instance name

Delay time

If the application needs to be When the application is ready


saved before it is ready choose choose “Compile”. The file will
“Save”. The file will be stored as then be saved as a loadable file
a “spi” file. “spr” and is of curse editable.

13 REV 3
Load view
The last view is the “Load view”. From this view it is possible to download and up load
applications to and from a connected SCS² system. Press the “Download” button and a
dialogue box will appear, choose the desired “spr” file and press the “Open” button.

Download

Choose file
and press
open

Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar.


First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the
connected node bar as percent.
Current transfer
completed (%)

Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if
necessary).
When the download is ready
this dialogue box appears.
Current transfer
completed (%)

Total transfer
completed (%)

14 REV 3
General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes,
but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced
with an Anybus
interface

Connecting the B1 node


Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the
picture below

L/2 4VD C
N/ 0V DC
SC S² SC S²
1 2 3 4 9 10
SC S 11 12

44 31 41 43 42 8 26 16 6 7

15 REV 3
Connecting the A1 node
Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector.
An “Anybus card” is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital
I/Os are located.

The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)


This card is used for translation
between different field buses and
a standardized format read by the
SCS² system.

There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector
for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification
of the unit in the outside net (3).

Item 3. HW address
1 2 3

*10 *1

The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the
Anybus-card and the outside net.
not used
(green) on-line on the Fieldbus
(red) off-line on the Fieldbus
(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows:
Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set
during configuration of the network.
Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.

16 REV 3
The Anybus card
is to be mounted
inside the hood on
the right upper
corner of the node

Connect an Anybus jumper


to the D-sub connector on
the Anybus card.
And connect to the outside
connector on the connection
rail beside the card.

On the connection rail the


wires from the D-sub should
be connected in the
following order from the
right 8 3 5 (for Profibus)

Fieldbus connector used for


connecting to the outside
interface.

17 REV 3
ABE
Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the ”pin configuration” view
and remove the switch from A1, add a new “switch” to B1 in Port id# 1
Then get in to the “component view” and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector
(on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is
acquired for the component to function.

Get an “Input bit”(1) from the “available component”


menu under the “Anybus” tab (2) and place it out in front
of the “OD timer” and also take an “or” gate from “gates” 1 2
and a “split” from “digital”.

Connect the switch to the “split”, the “input bit” and the “split” to the “or” and the “or” to
the “OD timer”. Yore connection should now be as below.

Choose an “Output bit” and connect it to the “split”

A red dot on any of the components


makes it impossible to compile the application.

18 REV 3
Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to
configure following.
“ ” is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
“ ” is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7)
“ ” is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63)
“ ” is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)

The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both
directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card
(outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than
in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.

19 REV 3
General
Compared to a conventional SCS² node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or
analogue I/O’s, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally
The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is
when the SCS² system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node)
on the crane PLC.

Status LEDs

Anybus card Power connector


(in this case
Profibus) BCAN connector

Node address key


switches
Serial port
connector

20 REV 3
BCAN - Status LEDs
There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status
and one red LED indicating error status.
is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and
flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended.
is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when
configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card)
is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2-
pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).
VCC 10 to 28 V DC 1
24Volt DC powers the node internally.
GND Ground 2
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-
pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in
the system have to be connected equal (bus CAN H CAN high 1
topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be CAN L CAN low 2
able to establish communication.

Node address key switches


There are five switches selecting node address. The node
identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the A1
conventional nodes.

For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane)


node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF.
Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set
DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.
A2

Serial port connector


The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a
computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS² nodes)
Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.

21 REV 3
Absolute encoder on the telescope
General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and
channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the “analogue” tab, the RS485
port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to
be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this
is the “scale” component. The “scale” component is also located under the “analogue”
tab.
Teach is used Add the RS485 port component
for storing from the analogue tab
positions
The scale component
makes it possible to
translate the sensor
value to the
mechanical distance

The RS485 component


This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle
some different types of protocol in this case “slin”.

each node has one RS485 input. To direct the


component in the software to the correct hardware input,
choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is
wired to.

it is possible to choose
between some different standardised
protocols to suit the sensor used.

When using the protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture
for data)
determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting
to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary.
how many steps (bits) per revolution.
how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.

22 REV 3
From bits to millimetres (scale)
Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single
twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a
note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same
procedure.
It is very important that the sensor doesn’t wraparound (when counting up, after
the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the
expanded value should be larger.

Right click on the scale component and choose “properties”


And fill in the noted values as following.
The measured max
value in millimeters
The measured min
value in millimeters
The up loaded max value
from the ABE online
The up loaded min value
from the ABE online

Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare
with the scaled value.

Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function
called “TEACH”. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is
possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter “PWM value for
teach” in APS properties) to the required length, for position “20ft”, hold the teach
command and give the go to position “20ft” command. The value is now stored in the
spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions.
The connection point for teach

The connection points for position


direct commands
The connection points for expand/
retract commands

If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by


activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on
the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is
given at the same time that position is destroyed.

23 REV 3
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock
counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system
without loosing this information.

Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following.

10V supply X2/36 Red


Serial data X2/16 Blue
Serial clock X2/26 Green
Signal ground X2/6 Black

The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS²
node within the cable range.

24 REV 3
Software
A “spreader properties” component needs to be added in the application, that make the
system try to find the “EE-prom” at boot.
The “spreader properties” component (1) is located in the “misc…” tab (2) in the
“available component” menu.

4
3
2 1

The “spreader properties” contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make
the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the
connection points on the left of the component (3).
The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net
(if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the
component (4).

25 REV 3
Activate the EE-prom
The EE-prom is activated after the “Serial number” value is set.
The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to.
Left click on the “Serial number” key in the BMS “spreader info” tab.
In the “current key” dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen “serial
number”.
Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the “set” button to store and
activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.

The “Spreader info” tag

The “get all” button

The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the
“spreader info” tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the “get all” button.

26 REV 3
User Manual

Version 1.0

Revision Issued by Date Measures

Printed: 05-2-23 13.40


Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Table of contents

1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5

2 INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5
2.1 HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.3 Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5

3 USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6

3.1 Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.2 Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.3 Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6

3.4 General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6


3.4.1 File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2 Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.4 Tools.................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.5 Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8

4 SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9

4.1 General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9

4.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9


4.2.1 Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.2 Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.3 Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.4 Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5 Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.6 Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.7 Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.8 Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.9 Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10

5 PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11

5.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11


5.2.1 Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.2 Exists port ........................................................................................................................................................ 11
5.2.3 Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
5.2.4 CANopen I/O................................................................................................................................................... 12

2(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

6 COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................13

6.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 13

6.2 Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 14


6.2.1 Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 14

6.3 Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 14


6.3.1 Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 14
6.3.2 Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.3 Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 15
6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 15
6.3.5 Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 15
6.3.7 Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 15

7 LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................16

7.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... 16

7.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 16

8 COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................17

8.1 Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 17
8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 17
8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 20
8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 24
8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 26
8.1.5 Tower – Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 29
8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 32
8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 36
8.1.8 Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 40
8.1.9 TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 42
8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 46
8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 50

8.2 AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 53


8.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.2 Anybus System................................................................................................................................................ 54
8.2.3 Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.4 Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.5 Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.2.6 Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 56
8.2.7 Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
8.2.8 Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 57

8.3 CANopen ................................................................................................................................................................ 58


8.3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.2 PDO Read Bit .................................................................................................................................................. 58
8.3.3 PDO Read........................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.4 PDO Write Bit ................................................................................................................................................. 59
8.3.5 PDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.3.6 SDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59

8.4 Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 61

3(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.4.1 Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 61


8.4.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 61
8.4.3 Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 62
8.4.4 Digital guard.................................................................................................................................................... 63

8.5 Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 64


8.5.1 AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 64
8.5.2 NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.3 NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.4 OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 66
8.5.5 NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.6 XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.7 SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.8 RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.9 Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 69

8.6 Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 69


8.6.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 70
8.6.3 OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 70
8.6.4 Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 71
8.6.5 Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 71

8.7 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 72


8.7.1 Constant ........................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.2 Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.3 Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.4 Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.5 Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 76
8.7.6 Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 76

8.8 Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 78
8.8.1 RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 78
8.8.2 IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
8.8.3 IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.4 IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.5 IN0 – IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.6 IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.7 Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.8 AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.9 Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.10 AuxAnalogue................................................................................................................................................... 82

9 TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................83

10 CANOPEN TUTORIAL ...............................................................................................90

4(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

1 Introduction
ABE – Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the
Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and
programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface.

In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied
together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system
together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the
target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection.

The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic
Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter
settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader
experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM
(log).

This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of
the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to
logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.

2 Installing ABE

2.1 HW requirements
The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are:
an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
at least 2Mb of free disk space.

2.2 Installation
Close any other applications running under windows.
Insert the CD into your station.
Run the file Setup.exe.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

2.3 Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

5(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions.
This chapter describes the four main functions of the program.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

3.1 Main window


The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the
four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations.
The application supports tool tips.
The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.

3.2 Error control


Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control
can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.

3.3 Multiple language support


The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.

3.4 General functions


The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.

3.4.1 File
Two types of files are available.
Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2.
Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but
want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.

3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.

3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.

3.4.1.3 Save As...


Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.

3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.

3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.

6(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

3.4.2 Edit

3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.

3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.

3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses
will also be pasted into the page.

3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.

3.4.3 Settings

3.4.3.1 Error Control


Turns the error control on/off.

3.4.3.2 Show hints


Turns the tool tips on/off.

3.4.3.3 Show component connection info


Turns information at component connection points on/off.

3.4.4 Tools

3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view


Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation


Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.3 Export parameters


Exports the selected components parameters to a file.

3.4.4.4 Import parameters


Imports parameters from a file to current project.

3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks


Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder
look activated.

7(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

3.4.5 Help

3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.

8(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

4 System view

4.1 General
The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system
properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes
intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name
corresponds to a unique address key setting.

The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of
checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that
system. An exception is if the “EXISTS” function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input
on the master node.
The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and
seven spreader nodes are available for selection.

Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as “Spreader stop” have to be checked here as well if these
functions are used.

Figure 4:1 System view

4.2 Functionality
The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out
(topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and
Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key.
You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
The properties are:

4.2.1 Author
This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.2 Last date saved


Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

9(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

4.2.3 Creation date


Displays the date of the current project’s creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project.
Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

4.2.4 Version number


A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.

4.2.5 Revision number


The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.

4.2.6 Spreader type


A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.7 Drawing number


A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.8 Customer
This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80
characters.

4.2.9 Comments
This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

10(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

5 Pin configuration view

5.1 General
The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list
corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed.
A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red.
The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN,
OUT or NC (Not connected) and if it’s a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited.

Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view

5.2 Functionality
This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each
individual I/O its’ nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments
to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the
component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit
I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of
groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.

5.2.1 Address key


The “address key” field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to
the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS 2 HW.

5.2.2 Exists port


The “exists port” is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input “replace” a node
within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active
in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of
Spreaders are to be used within the same system.

11(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

5.2.3 Anybus I/O


With this button you can view all Anybus inputs and outputs in current spreader program.

5.2.4 CANopen I/O


With this button the CANopen configuration form appears, from this view you can create the CANopen functionality.
You can add up to 15 CANopen slaves and add inputs and outputs on each slave (Digital and Analogue).
Advanced configuration of a CANopen slave can be done by using SDO:s (Service Data Object).

For more information about CANopen see general available sources.

Figure 5:2:4 CANopen configuration view

12(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

6 Component view

6.1 General
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available
in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse.

Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and “_” (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 6:1 Component view Figure 6:2 Palette

Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.

13(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual.

Name Symbol Description


Output tag An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making
the program more readable and efficient.
Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed
by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s)
Input tag An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag.
Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be
followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag.
Component A component contains logic. The components range from
simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full
functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of
the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or
right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its’
properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A
component also carries component connection points (round
circles).
A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be
Component connection connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the
connection point is connected it turns white. This means that
it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white
although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.

Output port A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the


Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple
connections are not possible for an Output port.
Input port A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the
Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view.
Multiple connections A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with
two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind
the user that the Input port has been connected at least once
before.
Component connection Information about the generic name of the component
information connection is shown above each connection point when
turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the
Settings menu.

6.2 Page functionality


One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be
accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary.

The component view provides the following functionality:

6.2.1 Adding pages


By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.

6.3 Component functionality


In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:

6.3.1 Adding a component


This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and
then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page you’re working on.

14(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

6.3.2 Moving a component


Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.

6.3.3 Selecting multiple components


Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).

6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components


The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same
application or in other ABE applications.

6.3.5 Delete a component


By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.

6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components


Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components.
One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists
displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags).
Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.

6.3.7 Online monitoring


Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS 2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2.

Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button.

Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked

The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.

Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).

15(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

7 Load view

7.1 General
The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is
selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the
three progress bars.

Figure 7:1 Load view

7.2 Functionality
When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a
compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is
shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of
the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.

16(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8 Components
Terminology:
In this section the follow terms are used:
False = 0 = logical low level
True = 1 = logical high level

Parameter – “Instance name”:


Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse
button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title “Instance
name”. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be
altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine
the interconnection between components.

State transition diagrams:


The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the
same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the
complete listing.
Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: “not All unlocked”
This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4).
The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand.
Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.

8.1 Controllers

8.1.1 TLC4 – Twistlock Controller 4


The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the
Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection
of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it
also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.1.1 State transition diagram


“Not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4
“Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
“Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).

LOCK_ALL:
Lock all Twistlocks.

UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock all Twistlocks.

IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.

17(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

For all states :


Transition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

LOCK_ALL

[ Lock after landed OR


(landed override AN D
Lock) ]

[ not All unlocked ] [ All locked ]

[ Lock after landed OR [ Unlock after landed OR


STARTUP
(landed override AN D (landed override AND
Lock) ] ID LE
Unlock) ]

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED

[ Unlock after landed


OR (landed override
AND Unlock) ]
UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4

8.1.1.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Landed override Digital Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command Digital Unlock command to unlock all
Twistlocks.
Lock command Digital Lock command to lock all
Twistlocks.

18(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.
Locked 1,..., Locked 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
on locked sensor 1 to 4.
Landed 1,..., Landed 4 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
on landed sensor 1 to 4

8.1.1.3 Output ports

Output Type Description


Unlock Digital Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.
Lock Digital Lock signal to all Twistlocks.
Locked signal Digital All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal Digital All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal Digital All Twistlocks are landed.

8.1.1.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Delay Milliseconds Time after all landed sensors are true
[ms] and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked 1,...,
Locked 4 shall become true within
this time when a lock output has
gone high.)
Timeout landed Milliseconds Time from the first landed input has
[ms] gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging Digital If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.1.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

19(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Code Message Description


60 TLC_NO_SENSOR No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
61 TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
62 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
63 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.
64 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal
has not been received after output to valve.
65 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
66 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
67 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
118 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT When override input is set to true and
ED previous state is false.
119 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV When override input is set to false and
ATED previous state is true.
175 TLC_LOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock lock command received
176 TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock unlock command received
177 TLC_LOCKED All Twistlocks have been locked
178 TLC_UNLOCKED All Twistlocks have been unlocked
244 TLC_LANDED The spreader has been landed.
245 TLC_UNLANDED The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)

8.1.2 TLC8 – Twistlock Controller 8


The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from
changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and
always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends
event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.2.1 State transition diagram


Twin is down (two containers):
“not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8

Twin is up (single container):


“not All unlocked” = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4)
“All unlocked” = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4

“Unlock after landed” = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
“Lock after landed” = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.

20(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).

LOCK_ALL:
Lock single and twin Twistlocks.

LOCK_SINGLE:
Lock single Twistlocks.

UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock single and twin Twistlocks.

UNLOCK_SINGLE:
Unlock single Twistlocks.

IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.

For a l l states: LOCK _A LL LOCK _S INGL E


T ra nsiti o n i s m a de to DIS AB LE D sta te i f
S prea derS top = 1or Enab l e = 0

[ T wi n i s down ]
[ T wi n i s up ]

[ A l l l ocked ]
[ A l l l ocked ]

[ Unlo ck after land ed OR


(land ed overrid e A ND
Unl ock) ]
[ Unlo ck after land ed
S T ART UP [ Lo ck after l and ed OR OR (l ande d overri de
[ Lock after l and ed OR
(lan de d overri de A ND AND Un lock) ]
IDL E (land e d overrid e A ND
Lock) ] Lock) ]

ena bl e = 1

[ A ll u nl ocked ]
DISA BL ED [ A l l u nl ocked ]
[ T wi n is do wn ]

T win is up

UNLOCK_ SINGLE
UNLOCK_ AL L

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8

21(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.2.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Landed override Digital Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command Digital Unlock command to unlock all
Twistlocks.
Lock command Digital Lock command to lock all
Twistlocks.
Twin unlocked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on unlocked sensor
Twin unlocked 4
Single unlocked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on unlocked sensor
Single unlocked 4
Twin locked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on locked sensor
Twin locked 4
Single locked 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on locked sensor
Single locked 4
Twin landed 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on landed sensor
Twin landed 4
Single landed 1 Digital Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status
… on landed sensor
Single landed 4
Twin is up Digital Input signal telling that Twinboxes
are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled
only.
TTDS Fault Digital Input signal telling that there is a
TTDS fault. Disables lock
operations.

8.1.2.3 Output ports

Output Type Description

22(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Unlock single Digital Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.


Unlock twin Digital Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Lock single Digital Lock signal to single Twistlocks.
Lock twin Digital Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Locked signal Digital All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal Digital All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal Digital All Twistlocks are landed.

8.1.2.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Delay Milliseconds Time after all landed sensors are true
[ms] and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked single 1,...,
Locked single 4 shall become true
within this time when a lock output
has gone high.)
Timeout landed Milliseconds Time from the first landed input has
[ms] gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging Digital If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.2.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


60 TLC_NO_SENSOR No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
61 TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
62 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
63 TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.

23(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

64 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal


has not been received after output to valve.
65 TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
66 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
67 TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
118 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT When override input is set to true and
ED previous state is false.
119 TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV When override input is set to false and
ATED previous state is true.
175 TLC_LOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock lock command received
176 TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND Twist-lock unlock command received
177 TLC_LOCKED All Twistlocks have been locked
178 TLC_UNLOCKED All Twistlocks have been unlocked
244 TLC_LANDED The spreader has been landed.
245 TLC_UNLANDED The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)

8.1.3 FAC – Flipper Arm Controller


The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the
component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to
the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

8.1.3.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).

IDLE:
This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached.

UP:
All Flippers are sent up.

DOWN:
All Flippers are sent down.

24(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

For all states :


Transition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
UP

[ UpCom m and ]

START_UP ID LE

[ DownCom m and ]

DISABLED DOWN

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC

8.1.3.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Up command Digital Command to send all Flippers up.
Down command Digital Command to send all Flippers down.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

8.1.3.3 Output ports

Output Type Description


Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n Digital Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n Digital Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.

8.1.3.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of Flippers Number The number of Flippers to be
controlled.

25(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Operation mode Option Impulse (only impulse required for


the command to execute) or Constant
(constant command required).
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.3.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


246 FAC_UP_COMMAND Flipper up command received
247 FAC_DOWN_COMMAND Flipper down command received

8.1.4 DPS – Discrete Positioning System


The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box
indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as
well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions
are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant
commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will
perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of
that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from
the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has
been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions aren’t reached within a parameter
adjusted time etc.
The DPS component is equipped with an “fast I/O concept”, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a
higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the
component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the
same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract).
If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the “fast I/O concept” will be disabled.

8.1.4.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.

EXPAND:
Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.

RETRACT:

26(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.

CONSTANT REPEAT:
When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must
be released before a new command will be excepted.
Example:
1. Expand command is given.
2. Next stop is reached.
3. The telescope stops.
4. Expand command is released.
5. New expand command is given.
6. The telescope continues.

DELAY:
A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in
Operation mode (parameter) else ignored.

“currentCommand” = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to
position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position
and desired position.

For all states :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

[ desiredStop = currentStop, [ desiredStop = current


Operation m ode = Delay ] EXPAND Stop, Operation m ode =
Constant repeat ]

[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]

[ Delay perform ed ] CONSTANT REPEAT


DELAY ID LE
[ com m andInput =
NO_CMD ]

[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ]

[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]

START_UP DISABLED

[ SpreaderStop = 0,
Enable = 1 ]

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS

8.1.4.2 Input ports

27(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Input Type Description


Expand command Digital Input command to expand telescope
to next stop.
Retract command Digital Input command to retract telescope
to next stop.
Return to position 0 Digital Input command to expand telescope
… to predefined stop. The number of
Return to position n predefined stops is set by the
parameter Number of stops.
Sensor 0 Digital Sensor input.
...
Example with 4 stops:
Sensor n
Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1,
Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3,
Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5,
Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6.
Etc..
Any landed Digital Sensor input from landed sensors.
Prevents telescoping when landed.
All unlocked Digital Sensor input from unlocked sensors.
Permits telescoping when unlocked.
Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Slave Digital Enables slave mode. Telescope will
run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled

8.1.4.3 Output ports

Output Type Description


Expand Digital Output to expand telescope.
Retract Digital Output to retract telescope.
In position 0,..., Reached stop n Digital Output signal indicating that the
specific valid stop has been reached.
In position Digital Output signal indicating that a valid
stop has been reached.

8.1.4.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

28(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Timeout Milliseconds Time permitted from when an output


[ms] is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Operation mode Option Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.
Delay at each stop Milliseconds Time the telescope is delayed
[ms] (stopped) at each stop.
Number of stops Number The number of stops in use.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the storing of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no generated messages will be stored.

8.1.4.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


68 DPS_TIMEOUT No valid stop reached within timeout
time.
69 DPS_SENSOR_MISSING The expected sensor has not been
reached within specified sequence.
70 DPS_SENSOR_LOST Position sensor has been lost without
any command given
71 DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR More than one position sensor active
simultaneously.
179 DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
180 DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
181 DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND A command to go to a certain
position received
182 DPS_STOP_REACHED A valid position has been reached

8.1.5 Tower – Head block


The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

8.1.5.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.

FEED_LEFT:

29(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Feeds the Tower to the left.

FEED_RIGHT:
Feeds the Tower to the right.

CENTER:
Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true.

DELAY:
A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).

For all states :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
FEED_LEFT FEED_RIGHT

[ Feed right ]

[ Feed left ]

START_UP ID LE

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ Center ]
[ Delay perform ed ]

DISABLED
CENTER DELAY

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower

8.1.5.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Enable right Digital Enables feeding in right direction.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Enable left Digital Enables feeding in left direction.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Right end sensor Digital Position sensor input.
At right sensor Digital Position sensor input.

30(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

At left sensor Digital Position sensor input.


Left end sensor Digital Position sensor input.
Right command Digital Input command to feed head block
right.
Left command Digital Input command to feed head block
left.
Centre command Digital Input command to feed head to the
centre position.

8.1.5.3 Output ports

Output Type Description


In centre Digital Output signal telling Head block is in
centre position.
At right side Digital Output signal telling Head block is to
the right.
At left side Digital Output signal telling Head block is to
the left.
Feed right Digital Output signal to feed Head block
right.
Feed left Digital Output signal to feed Head block left.

8.1.5.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Operation mode Option Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only
valid for the Centre command
Delay Milliseconds Time before a change of direction
[ms] will take effect.
Timeout Milliseconds Time permitted from when an output
[ms] is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped.
Use end stops Option If set true (checked) Right end sensor
and Left end sensor does not need to
be connected.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.5.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

31(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Code Message Description


325 TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND Centre command is given.
326 TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND Feed left command is given.
327 TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND Feed right command is given.
328 TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS Tower has reached centre position.
329 TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS Tower has reached left position.
330 TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS Tower has reached right position.
369 TOWER_TIMEOUT Tower has not reached the desired
position within the time limit.

8.1.6 APS – Automatic Positioning System


The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the
chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is
possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be
used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract
commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter
as well as are certain parts of its’ behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The
absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

8.1.6.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.

EXPAND:
Expands telescope.
PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true.

RETRACT:
Retracts telescope.
PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true.

DELAY:
Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter)
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

32(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

CONSTANT_REPEAT:
A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode
(parameter).
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

For all states :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
EXPAND [ Operation m ode = Delay ] DELAY

[ desiredPosition >
currentPos ition ]

[ Operation m ode = [ Operation m ode = Delay,


Im puls e, des iredPosition des iredPosition = currentPos ition ]
= currentPos ition ]

[ Delay perform ed ]

STARTUP ID LE

[ no button is pres sed ]


[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ Operation m ode = Im puls e,


des iredPosition = current
Pos ition ] [ Operation m ode = Constant repeat,
des iredPosition = currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPosition <
currentPos ition ]

DISABLED [ Operation m ode =


RETRACT Constant repeat ] CONSTANT REPEAT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS

8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions


This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach
input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the
encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops,
have to be taught a value.

8.1.6.3 Input ports

Input Type Description

33(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false


component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Teach Digital Command to teach in new positions.
When this signal is true any Go
position command will store a new
position for corresponding stop.
Slave mode Digital Enables slave mode. Telescope will
run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled.
Hooks are up Digital Input signal indicating that all hooks
are in up position. Only used for twin
telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is
connected here telescoping is
permitted, can also be used as a
general permit.
Any landed Digital Input result from landed sensors.
Go position 0 Digital Command to feed to defined
… positions 0,...,n.
Go position n
Retract command Digital Command to retract telescope.
Expand command Digital Command to expand telescope.
Current position Analogue Scaled input signal of the current
position.

8.1.6.4 Output ports

Output Type Description


Stop position0 Analogue Output signal indicating the stored
… positions for the corresponding stop.
Stop position n
In position Digital Output signal indicating that a valid
stop has been reached.
In position 0 Digital Output signal indicating that the
… specific valid stop has been reached.
In position n
PWM retract PWM PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
PWM expand PWM PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
Digital retract Digital Digital output to control the
telescope.

34(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Digital expand Digital Digital output to control the


telescope.
Digital high speed Digital Digital output for high speed
telescoping in two-speed system.

8.1.6.5 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Delay at each stop Milliseconds Delay time at each stop if Expand or
[ms] Retract command is given and Delay
is enabled under Operation mode.
Timeout Milliseconds Time until from when an output is
[ms] turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Number of stops Number The number of stops enabled.
Auto correction Option If enabled the APS will feed back the
telescope to its original position if it
of some reason has got out of
position.
Operation mode Option Impulse: sequence completes until a
new command is given
Delay: delay at each stop
Constant repeat: when a stop is
reached a new expand or retract
command must be given.
Stop window Millimetre Distance from defined stop to be
considered as a stop.
[mm]
Signal window Millimetre Window around the desired position
[mm] in which a signal indicating that the
correct position has been reached is
given.
Impact range Millimetre Hysterisis for impact detection.
[mm]
Impact off delay timer Milliseconds Delay after impact detected to run.
[ms]
Length of travel Millimetre Distance between minimum and
maximum positions.
[mm]
Time of telescope Milliseconds Time between minimum and
maximum positions.
[ms]
Ramp Gain Number Ramp gain.
[value *1000]

35(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Ramp offset Millimetre Ramp offset for stop speed


[mm]
Time to reach max speed Milliseconds The time it shall take to reach max
speed.
[ms]
Proportional Gain Number Proportional part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
Integral Gain Number Integral part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
PWM value for teach Number PWM output when teach enabled.
Reverse Min PWM output Number Minimum value on PWM that causes
a reversed movement.
Reverse Max PWM output Number Maximum value on PWM that causes
a reversed movement
Forward Min PWM output Number Minimum value on PWM that causes
a forward movement.
Forward Max PWM output Number Maximum value on PWM that causes
a forward movement.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.6.6 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


183 APS_TIMEOUT The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time
limit.
184 APS_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
185 APS_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
186 APS_GOPOS_COMMAND Command to go to a specific position received
187 APS_STOP_REACHED The desired position reached
272 APS_TEACH_COMMAND Teach in command received
396 APS_IMPACT_ON Impact is detected
397 APS_AUTOCORR_ON Spreader is auto correcting
398 APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T The position value is not within the teached range.
EACH_RANGE
399 APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_ Spreader is bumped out of signal window.
WIN

8.1.7 MPS – Memory position system


The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin
telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to
return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has

36(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a
command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

8.1.7.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.

Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.

EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.

RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.

For all states :


Transition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

RETRACT

[ desiredPosition < currentPosition ]

[ desiredPosition = currentPosition ]

STARTUP ID LE

[ desiredPosition = currentPosition ]
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ desiredPosition > currentPosition ]

DISABLED
EXPAND

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS

37(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.7.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Current position Analogue Scaled input signal reading the
current position.
Return to predefined position 0 Digital Command to feed Twin boxes to
... predefined position 0,...,n
Return to predefined position n

Returned to stored position 0 Digital Command to feed Twin boxes to


... logged position 0,...,n
Returned to stored position n
Store new position 0 Digital Command to log new positions.
... When this signal is true the current
Store new position n position will be stored in the RAM of
the SCS2.
Teach Digital Command to teach in new positions.
When this signal is true any Go to
pre-defined position command will
store a new position for
corresponding stop.

8.1.7.3 Output ports

Output Type Description


Current reference position Analogue Signal indicating the currently
desired position.
Predefined position 0 Analogue Signal indicating the positions for the
… corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position n
Predefined position 0 Analogue Signal indicating the positions for the
… corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position n
Logged position 0 Analogue Output signal indicating the positions
… for the corresponding logged stop.
Logged position n
In position Digital Output signal indicating that any
position has been reached & logged
or predefined).
Expand Digital Output signal to expand Twin boxes.
Retract Digital Output signal to retract Twin boxes.

38(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.7.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Stop window Millimetre Offset from stop to be considered as
[mm] a stop.
Operation mode Option Impulse: sequence completes until a
new command is given
Constant: when a stop is reached a
new expand or retract command must
be given.
Predefined positions Number The number of stops that will be
stored in none volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be available after
shutting down system.)
Storable positions Number The number of stops that will be
stored in volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be lost when shutting
down system.)
Timeout Milliseconds Time from when an output is turned
[ms] on until a valid position should be
reached. If this time is exceeded the
motion will be stopped and a warning
generated.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.7.5 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


281 MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS Teach command received.
282 MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS Command to go to a pre-defined position has
been received.
280 MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS A command to store a new value for a log
position has been received.
284 MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS A command to return to a log position has been
received.
285 MPS_TIMEOUT The twin-legs haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.

39(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.8 Twin Telescope


The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs.
The component, although it doesn’t hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

8.1.8.1 State transition diagram

States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.

STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.

IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false.
Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right
sensor is false.

EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false.

RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.

For all states :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
EXPAND

[ Expand, !in45Pos ]

[ !Expand OR in45Pos ]

STARTUP ID LE

[ !Retract OR (inZeroPosLeft, in
[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ] ZeroPos Right) ]

[ Retract, !inZeroPos Left,


!inZeroPos Right ]

DISABLED RETRACT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope

40(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.8.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
In 45ft Digital Sensor input signal.
In zero right Digital Sensor input signal.
In zero left Digital Sensor input signal.
Retract command Digital Command input to retract the twin
boxes.
Expand command Digital Command input to expand the twin
boxes.

8.1.8.3 Output ports

Output Type Description


Retract Digital Output signal to retract twin boxes.
Expand Digital Output signal to expand twin boxes.

8.1.8.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Timeout Milliseconds Time until from when an output is
[ms] turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.8.5 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


273 TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND Expand command received
274 TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND Retract command received
275 TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT Left console reached zero gap position
276 TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT Right console reached zero gap position

41(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

277 TWINTELE_EXPANDING Twinlegs expand in motion

278 TWINTELE_RETRACTING Twinlegs retract in motion


279 TWINTELE_TIMEOUT Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion
within time limit

8.1.9 TwinUpDown
The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin
up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down
consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks
situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the
hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until
the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are
fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output “ Twin up ready pulse ”,
which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.

42(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.9.1 State transition diagram

TWIN_UP TWIN_DOWN
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft 2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook [ twinDownRequestM ]
Disconnected || !hookRight LeftDisconnected &&
Disconnected ] RAISE_BOXES
hookR ightDis connected) ]
CONN ECT

[ !allTwinUp ] [ allTwinUp ]

[ hookLeftConnected && hook


1 : [ !allTwinUp || RightConnected ]
!hookLeftDisconnected
RAISE_HOOKS || !hookRight
Disconnected ]

[ hookLeftDis connected &&


hookR ightDis connected ] BOXES_DOWN

2 : [ !(twinInZeroPosLeft
&& twinInZeroPosRight) ] IN CH_IN

2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF


_DELAY_INCH && twinInZero [ anyTwinU p ] [ !anyTwinUp ]
Pos Left && tw inInZeroPos
Right && energiseInchInM ]

3:

HOLD_DOWN
HOLD_UP
OFF_DELAY_INCH
1 : [ !(twinInZeroPosLeft && tw inIn
ZeroPos Right) || delayM.isTim eout() ]
Trans ition to IDLE state if Trans ition to IDLE state if
tw inDownCom m and tw inUpCom m and
H* H*

[ twinUpCom m and ]

[ twinDownCom m and ] 1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin


DownCom m and && hookLeft
Connected && hookRightC onnected ]

ID LE
2 : [ anyTwinU p && !(hook
LeftConnected && hook 2 : [ twinUpRequestM ] 1 : [ !anyTw inUp && hook
RightConnected) ] LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected ]
3:

STARTUP

For all states :


[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] DISABLED
Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown

43(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.1.9.2 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Twin box up 1 Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
… boxes are up.
Twin box up 4
Hook connected right Digital Sensor input indicating that right
hook is down.
Hook connected left Digital Sensor input indicating that left hook
is down.
Right attach permit Digital Sensor input indicating that position
has been reached to attach twin boxes
on right side.
Left attach permit Digital Sensor input indicating that position
has been reached to attach twin boxes
on left side.
Hook disconnected right Digital Sensor input indicating that hook is
up on right side.
Hook disconnected left Digital Sensor input indicating that hook is
up on left side.
Twin in zero right Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
boxes has reached zero position on
right side.
Twin in zero left Digital Sensor input indicating that Twin
boxes has reached zero position on
left side.
Chain in 40ft Digital Sensor input indicating that chain is
in 40ft position.
Permit twin down Digital Permits down motion if set to true.
Permit twin up Digital Permits up motion if set to true.
Twin down command Digital Command to send Twin boxes down.
Twin up command Digital Command to send Twin boxes up.

8.1.9.3 Output port

Output Type Description


Twin up ready pulse Digital Signal telling that up sequence is
completed.
Twin down Digital Signal to lower Twin boxes.
Twin up Digital Signal to raise Twin boxes.

44(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Disconnect twin unit left Digital Signal to disconnect left hook.


Disconnect twin unit right Digital Signal to disconnect right hook.
Connect twin unit left Digital Signal to connect left hook.
Connect twin unit right Digital Signal to connect right hook.
Inch to zero gap Digital Signal to inch in Twin boxes.
Inch to connect left Digital Signal to inch out left Twin box.
Inch to connect right Digital Signal to inch out right Twin box.

8.1.9.4 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Timeout Twin down Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Timeout hook Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Timeout Twin inching Milliseconds Time until a warning message will be
[ms] prompted if sequence doesn’t
complete.
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.9.5 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


255 TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT Twin boxes have failed to get to their
upper position within time limit.
256 TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT Left hook has failed to reach its' upper
position within time limit.
257 TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT Right hook has failed to reach its' upper
position within time limit.
258 TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT Twin boxes left timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
259 TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT Twin-boxes right timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
260 TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT Left hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
261 TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT Right hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.

45(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

262 TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT Twin-boxes have failed to get to their


lower position within time limit.
263 TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not
due to output).
264 TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST Twin up sensor received when twin-
boxes are down.
265 TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST Left hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
266 TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST Right hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
267 TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
268 TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
286 TWIN_UP_COMMAND Twin up command has been received.
287 TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND Twin down command has been received.
288 TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP Twin boxes have reached their upper
position.
289 TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN Twin boxes have reached their lower
position.

8.1.10 PID

8.1.10.1 Overview
The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders
with special requirements.
Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed.
The PID component have the following features:
Position control
Velocity control
Syncronisation of two cylinders
Acceleration limitation

These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5.

The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.

8.1.10.2 Position control


The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position
mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with
configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The position mode can be activated in run time.

8.1.10.3 Velocity control


In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range –100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then
moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as
fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The velocity mode can be activated in run time.
When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.

8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders


Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in
the PID to handle this.

46(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

There are two different kind of syncronisation modes:


Parallel sync
Non-parallel sync
Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position
between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode.
Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means
that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions
during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions.
In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position.
You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.

8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation


Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an acceleration limiter is
installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation.
The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.

8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used.
Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify
the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively.
When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0.

For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.10.7 Input Ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables regulator if set true.
Regulator mode Digital Sets the operational mode,
POSITION (Low level, 0) or
VELOCITY (High level, 1).
Sync parallel mode Digital
Synchronise Digital

Reference value Analogue Reference value. This signal is scaled


within the component and must not
be pre-scaled or scaled to desired
value.

(Port not visible in ABE)


Input Type Description
Sensor value Analogue Depending on regulator index the
sensor signal will be read from either
analogue input 0 or analogue input 1.
This signal is scaled within the
component and must not be pre-
scaled.

8.1.10.8 Output Ports

47(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Output Type Description


Retract output (PWM) Analogue The actual value sent to the PWM
when retracting.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Expand output (PWM) Analogue The actual value sent to the PWM
when expanding.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Retracting Digital This signal indicates that the
regulator is retracting.
Expanding Digital This signal indicates that the
regulator is expanding.

(Ports not visible in ABE)


Output Type Description
PWM 0 Analogue Used for forward output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 1 Analogue Used for reverse output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 2 Analogue Used for forward output (PID 1 which
is the same as Regulator index 1).
PWM 3 Analogue Used for reverse output (PID 1 which
is the same as Regulator index 1).

8.1.10.9 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Filter weight Percent The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
[%]
Aim window Millimetres The distance from the reference
position where to aim for the non-
[mm]
linear regulator. It is only used in
Position mode.
Rate limiter gain Number This should be the frequency [Hz],
i.e. 1/sample interval.
Fraction of square root Percent Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 60-
[%]
90.

48(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Switch window Millimetres Distance from reference position


where to switch from the non linear
[mm]
regulator to the PI regulator. This
parameter must be higher than the
Aim window parameter. It is only
used in Position mode.
Time to reach input Milliseconds Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
[ms]
mode.
Sync max integrator Percent Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
[%]
Sync Integral (I) Number Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync Proportional (P) Number Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sample interval Milliseconds Sampling interval.
[ms]
Velocity window Percent When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
[%]
window it is interpreted as zero.
Position window Millimetres When regulating position the
cylinder will stop when it reaches
[mm]
reference position +/- Position
window.
Device length Millimetres Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
[mm]
Insignal max Number Maximum insignal from analogue
input.
Insignal min Number Minimum insignal from analogue
input.
R Half PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between
[ms] Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.
R Max PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between
[ms] Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.
R Min PWM Number Minimum PWM output that causes
movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
R Half PWM Number PWM output between R Min PWM
and R Max PWM.
Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max
PWM) / 2
R Max PWM Number Minimum PWM output at max
speed. (Upper threshold limit).

49(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

F Half PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between 0


[ms] and Device length at F Half PWM.
F Max PWM time Milliseconds Time for transportation between 0
[ms] and Device length at F Max PWM.
F Min PWM Number Minimum PWM output that causes
movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
F Half PWM Number PWM output between F Min PWM
and F Max PWM.
Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max
PWM) / 2
F Max PWM Number Minimum PWM output at max
speed. (Upper threshold limit).
Pos. Integral (I) Number Integral part of PI regulator. Only
used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Pos. Proportional (P) Number Proportional part of PI regulator.
Only used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Acceleration limit Milliseconds Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
[ms]
Regulator index Number Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
PWM3 and analogue input 1.
Node Option Location of regulator. Choose
between B1 – B8 and A1 – A4.
Store mode Option Select which parameters to use:
ALL PARAMS: use all parameters
from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
REGULATOR PARAMS: use only
the regulator parameters from
NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear
parameters from NVRAM stored by
AutoTuner
ABE ONLY: use parameters only
from Spreader program file

8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and
measuring it’s characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID
components, it’s possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check
box Prepare for sync parameter.

50(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

The AutoTuner will store it’s measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and
monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is
supposed to use the auto tuned parameters.

For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.11.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component if set true. When
the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the
auto tune procedure is restarted.
Slave Analogue Sensor input signal for the slave
cylinder. Only needed if prepare for
sync is checked.
Main Analogue Sensor input signal for the cylinder to
auto tune.

8.1.11.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


Finished Digital Output for telling when tuning is
complete.
Slave Retract Analogue Output for retracting slave cylinder.
Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Slave Expand Analogue Output for expanding slave cylinder.
Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Main Retract Analogue Output for retracting main cylinder.
This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Main Expand Analogue Output for expanding main cylinder.
This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.

8.1.11.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

51(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Position window Millimeter When regulating position the


cylinder will stop when it reaches
[mm]
reference position +/- Position
window.
Velocity window Percents When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
[%]
window it is interpreted as zero.
Sync Proportional [P] Number Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync Integral [I] Number Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
[value * 1000]
Sync max integrator Percents Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
[%]
Time to reach input Milliseconds Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
[ms]
mode.
Fraction of square root Percents Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 60-
[%]
90.
Filter weight Percents The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
[%]
Natural frequency Number
[value * 1000]
Moderation factor Number
[value * 1000]
Regulator index Number Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
PWM3 and analogue input 1.
Sample interval Milliseconds Sampling interval.
[ms]
Acceleration limit Milliseconds Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
[ms]
Device length Millimetre Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
[mm]
Timeout Milliseconds Timeout for a full cylinder stroke.
This parameter must be greater than
[ms]
the tiem it takes for the cylinder to
perform a full stroke.
Record name Text The instance name of the matching
PID component.

52(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Prepare for sync Option This shall be enabled when using


syncronisation between two
cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder
to the slower one.

8.1.11.4 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2.

Code Message Description


385 AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM The component has stored it’s
parameters in NVRAM.

8.2 AnyBus

8.2.1 Introduction
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the
crane can utilise the SCS 2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.

The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics
are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard
display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for

53(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and
therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic
message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.

8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.


The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.


This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0 => Node ID
Byte 1-2 (WORD) => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD) => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 9-10 (WORD) => Sequential counter

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

8.2.2 Anybus System


The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr).
Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.

8.2.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Download start Digital If set true, component expects
download data on Anybus.

8.2.2.2 Parameters
Parameter Unit Description
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.
Log active Option Indicates if the log should be
exported to the Anybus interface or
not.

54(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Log address 0-63 The Anybus output address in the


access area where the log should be
exported.
Assert active Option Indicates if the assert log should be
exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
Assert address 0-63 The Anybus output address in the
access area where the assert log
should be exported.

8.2.3 Output Word

8.2.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Analogue Input from analogue input port.

8.2.3.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number Number Word in Anybus interface to which
the value from ”IN” is to be
transferred to.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.4 Output Byte

8.2.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Analogue Input from analogue input port.

8.2.4.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

55(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Byte number Number Byte in Anybus interface to which


the value from ”IN” is to be
transferred to.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.5 Output Bit

8.2.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Digital Input from digital input port.

8.2.5.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number Number Bit number of the chosen byte in
Anybus interface.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.6 Input Word

8.2.6.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue The word number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the “OUT” value.

8.2.6.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number Analogue The word within the Anybus
interface from which

56(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Node Node id The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.7 Input Byte

8.2.7.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue The byte number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the “OUT” value.

8.2.7.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

8.2.8 Input Bit

8.2.8.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital value from Anybus interface.

8.2.8.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Byte number Number Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number Number Bit number in Anybus interface.
Node Node id The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

57(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.3 CANopen

8.3.1 Introduction
CANopen is a field bus protocol based on CAN and provides a flexible and powerful open industrial communication
solution.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes the SCS2 master node can control up to 15 CANopen slaves. The SCS2 master
node act’s as a CANopen master, this includes network management, SDO services and PDO handling.
The SCS2 master node processes the CANopen slave data i.e reads inputs and controls outputs.

All configuration of the CANopen functionality is made in the CANopen IO configuration view described in section
5.2.4. Note that the components described in the following section is not visible in the component palette.

The following components is used to create CANopen IO and SDO objects.

8.3.2 PDO Read Bit

8.3.2.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital value from CANopen slave

8.3.2.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Slave node ID Number Node id of CANopen slave
PDO number Number PDO number
Byte Number Number Byte in PDO
Bit number Number Bit in byte

8.3.3 PDO Read

8.3.3.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue Analogue value from CANopen slave

8.3.3.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Slave node ID Number Node id of CANopen slave
PDO number Number PDO number
Start Byte in PDO Number Start Byte in PDO
Start Bit number Number Start bit in Byte

58(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Data Length Number Length of data

8.3.4 PDO Write Bit

8.3.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Input Digital Digital value written to CANopen
slave

8.3.4.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Slave node ID Number Node id of CANopen slave
PDO number Number PDO number
Byte in PDO Number Byte in PDO
Bit number Number Bit in Byte

8.3.5 PDO Write

8.3.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Input Analogue Analogue value written to CANopen
slave

8.3.5.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Slave node ID Number Node id of CANopen slave
PDO number Number PDO number
Start Byte in PDO Number Start Byte in PDO
Start Bit number Number Start Bit in Byte
Data Length Number Length of data

8.3.6 SDO Write

8.3.6.1 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Slave node ID Number Node id of CANopen slave

59(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

OD index Number Index in OD (dec)


OD sub index Number Sub index in OD
Value Number Value written to OD
Size of data Option Unsigned 8: The size of data(value)
is 1 byte
Unsigned 16: The size of data(value)
is 2 byte
Unsigned 32: The size of data(value)
is 4 byte
Sequence number Number Specifies in which order all SDO
objects will be sent

60(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.4 Guards

8.4.1 Spreader stop


The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them
to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log

8.4.1.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Digital Command to stop spreader.
true = spreader stops
false = spreader stop resumed

8.4.1.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.4.1.3 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging

Code Message Description


97 SPREADER_STOP Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated.
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.

8.4.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System


The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting
two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful
lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output
can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is
designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an
override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS
component generates log messages every time an override has been used.

8.4.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Override Digital Overrides TTDS result.
true = output (Twin) is always false
false = normal output

61(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Sensor 1 Digital Input from TTDS sensors.


...
Sensor 7

8.4.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital true = two containers detected
false = one or none detected

8.4.2.3 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


290 TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED Override request received.
291 TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED Override request ended.

8.4.3 Analogue guard


The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values
can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9)
unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 – 155 within the log system. Apart from sending
a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the
parameters of the component.

8.4.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Analogue Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

8.4.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Signal indicating that Analogue input
has gone outside lower or upper limit
longer than the specified time Delay.

8.4.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

62(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Note Text Descriptive string indicating the


function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Delay Milliseconds Time until warning message is
[ms] prompted if Analogue input has gone
out of boundaries.
Lower limit Number Lower limit of allowable input range.
Upper limit Number Upper limit of allowable input range.
Warning code Option Warning code that will identify the
component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.4.3.4 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


146 USERDEFINED_0 User chooses what message to use. The messages
… ... generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read
155 USERDEFINED_9 out of the log.

8.4.4 Digital guard


The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.

8.4.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.4.4.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Note Text Descriptive string indicating the
function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Input NO/NC Option Normally open or normally closed
behaviour on input.

63(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Delay Milliseconds Time until warning message is


[ms] prompted if digital value is true or
false (depending on input NO / NC
setting).
Warning code Option Warning code that will identify the
component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.4.4.3 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


146 USERDEFINED_0 User chooses what message to use. The messages generated
… ... in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
155 USERDEFINED_9

8.5 Gates
This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.

8.5.1 AND
This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

8.5.1.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN0 Digital Digital value from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.5.1.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from AND
operation.

64(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.5.1.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.5.2 NAND
This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

8.5.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.5.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from NAND
operation.

8.5.2.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.5.3 NOR
This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0

65(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.5.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.5.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from NOR
operation.

8.5.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.5.4 OR
This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

8.5.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Digital Digital values from other component
... or digital input port.
IN n

8.5.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from OR
operation.

66(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.5.4.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of inputs Number Number of inputs on component.

8.5.5 NOT
This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.

Basic function
IN OUT
0 1
1 0

8.5.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.5.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from NOT
operation.

8.5.6 XOR
This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the
parameter settings.

Basic function
IN 0 IN n OUT
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

8.5.6.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
IN 1 Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

67(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.5.6.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from XOR
operation.

8.5.7 SR Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).

8.5.7.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Set Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
Reset Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.5.7.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Digital output result from SR latch.

8.5.8 RS Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).

8.5.8.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Set Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
Reset Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.5.8.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


Result Digital Digital output result from RS latch.

68(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.5.9 Logical gate


The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values.
Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.

8.5.9.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set Result to zero.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. enabled all time).
IN 1 Analogue Input value 1.
IN 2 Analogue Input value 2.

8.5.9.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


Result Analogue Result of logical operation.

8.5.9.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Operation mode Option Determents type of logical operation
preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The
operations available are AND, OR
and XOR.

8.6 Digital

8.6.1 OD Timer – On Delay Timer


The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.

8.6.1.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port. Starts the timer
on positive flank.

8.6.1.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

69(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

OUT Digital Digital output that goes high if the


input is high and the specified time
has elapsed.

8.6.1.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Delay Milliseconds Time that the in put signal is to be
[ms] delayed before the output goes high

8.6.2 UpDn Counter – Up Down Counter


The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN
input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero.
The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).

8.6.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Up Digital Increments the counter value
Down Digital Decrements the counter value
Reset Digital Sets the counter value to zero

8.6.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital OUT = 1 (high) when the counter
value is equal to or above the
specified value in the parameter
listing
Counter value Analogue The current value of the counter

8.6.2.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Trigger count Digital The counter value when the digital
output goes high. The output is on
when the counter value is equal to or
above this value.

8.6.3 OSC - Oscillator


The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.

8.6.3.1 Input ports

70(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

8.6.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital Clock pulse output.

8.6.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Cycle time Milliseconds Cycle time for Clock output.
[ms]

8.6.4 Split
The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in
many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the
same.

8.6.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Digital Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

8.6.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT 0 Digital Outputs have same status as the IN
… input port
OUT n

8.6.4.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of outputs Number Number of outputs on component.

8.6.5 Pulse
The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged
on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse.
An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.

71(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.6.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Input Digital Trigger for starting pulse.

8.6.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


Time remaining Analogue Time remaining (ms) until pulse is
unlit.
Output Digital Pulse output.

8.6.5.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Active flank Option Determines active flank of trigger,
POS or NEG.
Length of pulse Milliseconds Duration of pulse.
[ms]

8.7 Miscellaneous

8.7.1 Constant
The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note
that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

8.7.1.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


Digital Digital Constant value > 0 : Digital output
= true
Constant value = 0 : Digital output
= false
Analogue Analogue Analogue output = Constant value

8.7.1.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description

72(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Value Number Value to put on output ports.

8.7.2 Dead end


The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be
used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that
signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one
doesn’t want the logic to control the outputs.

8.7.2.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


Digital IN Digital Terminates a digital connection.
Analogue IN Analogue Terminates an analogue connection.

8.7.3 Spreader properties

8.7.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Twin boxes are down Digital Input port telling that twin boxes are
down.
Landed Digital Input port telling that spreader has
landed.
Locked Digital Input port telling that all Twist locks
are locked.
Unlocked Digital Input port telling that all Twist locks
is unlocked.
Pump 1 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 1. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 1
counts.
Pump 2 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 2. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 2
counts.
Pump 3 on Digital Used for activating the clock for
drive time 3. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 3
counts.

8.7.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description

73(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Number of lock operations on twin Analogue Number of lock operations


performed on twin Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of lock operations on single Analogue Number of lock operations
performed on single Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of containers Analogue Number of containers handled. When
twin is down this number is
incremented by two. Saved in
external EEPROM.
Spreader serial number Analogue Spreader unique number. User
defined. Read from external
EEPROM.
Drawing number Analogue Spreader unique number. User
defined. Read from parameter
Drawing number.
Counter clock pulse Digital Clock pulse that toggles from false to
true when container is handled.
When a new sequence is ended
output goes back to false.
Drive time 1 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 1 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 2 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 2 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 2 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 2 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

74(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Drive time 3 HI Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 3 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Drive time 3 LO Word Analogue Accumulated drive time since
delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 3 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

8.7.3.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Enable logging Option If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.
Drawing number Number User defined number. Number is
used to present the drawing number
of the spreader.

8.7.3.4 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS 2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.

Code Message Description


318 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E Last saved properties are read from
EPROM EEPROM.
319 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D System has read properties from NVRAM.
S
320 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF Spreader properties read from EEPROM
and NVRAM differ.
321 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP System succeeded to write properties to
ROM_OK EEPROM.
322 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP System failed to write properties to
ROM_FAIL EEPROM.
323 SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N System detected that a new node is
ODE_TO_EEPROM connected since last shut down.

8.7.4 Memory
The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.

8.7.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description

75(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false


component will set the Analogue
OUT to zero. Default value if not
connected is true (i.e. no effect).
Write Digital If set true, component reads
Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.
Read Digital If set true, component reads from
NVRAM and writes to Analogue
OUT.
Analogue IN Analogue Analoge value that is to be stored.

8.7.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


Analogue OUT Analogue Value stored in NVRAM.

8.7.5 Digital buffer


The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

8.7.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Digital IN Digital Digital value that is to be buffered.

8.7.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT 0 Digital Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
..
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
OUT n next cycle and so on.

8.7.5.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of samples to hold Number Number of cycles to remember.

8.7.6 Analogue buffer


The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

76(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.7.6.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
zero. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Analogue IN Analogue Analogue value that is to be buffered.

8.7.6.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT 0 Analogue Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
..
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
OUT n next cycle and so on.

8.7.6.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Number of samples to hold Number Number of cycles to remember.

77(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.8 Analogue
The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.

8.8.1 RS485 port


This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view
the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

8.8.1.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue Analogue value of output from
sensor

8.8.1.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Protocol Option Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor
specific protocol). Only SLIN is
implemented SSI is implemeted.
Node Option Node the RS485 sensor is connected
to.
Code Type Option Applys only if SSI protocol is
selected
Input resolution Number Applys only if SSI protocol is
selected. Specifies the resolution of
the component.

8.8.2 IN0 > IN1

8.8.2.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

8.8.2.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Digital IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1
IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0

78(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.8.3 IN0 * IN1

8.8.3.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

8.8.3.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 * IN 1

8.8.4 IN0 / IN1


Note. Always avoid division by zero.

8.8.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Analogue Nominator input
IN 1 Analogue Denominator input

8.8.4.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 / IN 1

8.8.5 IN0 – IN1

8.8.5.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Analogue Input
IN 1 Analogue Input

8.8.5.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 – IN 1

79(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.8.6 IN0 + IN1

8.8.6.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN 0 Analogue Inputs to be added together
...
IN n

8.8.6.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, …,+ IN n

8.8.6.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Input counter Number Number of input ports on component.

8.8.7 Scale
The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula,
OUT = ((scaledMax – scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin,
which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.

8.8.7.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


IN Analogue Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

8.8.7.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue Scaled analogue value with
constraints from parameter listing.

8.8.7.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Max value after scale Number Largest scaled value.
Min value after scale Number Smallest scaled value.

80(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Max value of input Number The maximum value of input.


Min value of input Number The minimum value of input.

8.8.8 AnalogueLatch
The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an
internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is
directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the
current value until a new digital command is given.

8.8.8.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Enable Digital Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
IN Digital Input that trigger the component to
read the value IN Value.
IN Value Analogue Input value that is read and stored in
the component

8.8.8.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


OUT Analogue The stored value of the component

8.8.9 Filter
The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.

8.8.9.1 Input ports

Input Type Description


Analogue IN Analogue Unfiltered signal.

8.8.9.2 Output ports

Output Type Description


Analogue OUT Analogue Filtered signal.

81(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

8.8.9.3 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Filter type Option Determines type of filter. Only
MOVING AVR is implemented.
Filter weight Number [%] Determents how many percents of
previous filtered signal that is to be
used.

8.8.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.

8.8.10.1 Output ports

Output Type Description


Port 5 Analogue Analogue value
Port 4 Analogue Analogue value

8.8.10.2 Parameters

Parameter Unit Description


Node Option Specifies the node.

82(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

9 Tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE.
Steps covered in this tutorial.
Creating a new project
System view
Pin configuration
Component view
Load view

Step 1: Creating a new project


Start ABE from your Start menu if it isn’t already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for
you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.

Figure 9:1 Create project

Step 2: System view


Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.

Figure 9:2 Activating nodes

Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.

Figure 9:3 Setting system parameters

83(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Step 3: Pin configuration


All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the
following names. Comment field is optional.

Figure 9:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1

Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4.
Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.

Figure 9:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2

Step 4: Component view


Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.

Figure 9:6 Choosing component

If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.

84(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Figure 9:7 Bringing up Available components

Place the component on Page 1 in the view.

Figure 9:8 Default look of FAC component

Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that
they are optional to connect.

Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.

Figure 9:9 Changing properties for FAC component

85(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

The new appearance for the component should look like this:

Figure 9:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers

By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about
the properties for the component or its connection.

Figure 9:11 Look of component hint

Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as
shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.

Figure 9:12 Making component connections

86(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Your component should now look like this:

Figure 9:13 Appearance of a connection

Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected.
If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect
when it appears.

When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item
identifiers in the Pin configuration view.
Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.

Figure 9:14 Appearance of a connection

Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu.
If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item
identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isn’t you must delete it.

Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name “tutorial.spr”.

Figure 9:15 The Spreader program contains errors

When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must
not edit this file.

87(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Step 5: Load view

Downloading spreader programs


1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 9:16 Select Connection

2. Press the Download button.


3. Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr).
4. Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the
master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected
node) and than distributed to the master node.

Uploading spreader programs

1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 9:17 Select Connection

2. Press the Upload button.


The two following dialogues will appear in sequence.
Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.

Figure 9:18 Save current spreader program

Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to
manually open the uploaded spreader program.)

Figure 9:19 Open spreader program in ABE

3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node.


When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.

88(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Step 6: Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.

1. Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).

2. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 9:20 Select Connection

3. Make sure Auto is not checked.

Figure 9:21 Deselect Auto option

If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval.

4. Start online monitoring

Figure 9:22 Start online monitoring

The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.

Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of
your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the
monitoring again.

5. Update online values by pressing the Update button.

Figure 9:23 Updated online values

89(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

6. Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.

Figure 9:24 Stop online monitoring

10 CANopen tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of configuring a Spreader program containing CANopen functionality.
The tutorial covers the following steps:
Add a CANopen slave
Add an input
Connecting input to Spreader logic

Step 1: Add a CANopen slave


In the Component view activate the CANopen configuration view by clicking CANopen IO button.
In this view click the Add slave button.

Figure 1. Add slave button

When this button is clicked the following view appears.


Here you can configure:
Type of slave (predefined connection set or not).
The name of the slave
Slave options (CRITICAL or NON CRITICAL).
Adress of slave 1-126

Click OK button when done

Figure 2. Slave properties

90(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Step 2: Add a CANopen input


Make sure that the I/O leaf in the tree view is selected as in the picture below.
Click on the Add input button.

Figure 2. Add input

The following view appears.

Figure 3. Input properties

In this view the properties of this input is set.


Name of the input (in this example IN_1)
PDO number
Byte number
Bit number
Data length
Click OK button when done

The CANopen I/O configuration view now looks like the picture below.

Figure 4. CANopen I/O cunfiguration view after input is added

91(92) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Step 3: Connecting CANopen input to Spreader logic


When no more configuration is to be done click the OK button to return to the Pin configuration view
Add a component to page and right click on the input to bring up the pop up window
Select the CANopen menu and the slave on where the input is configured and click on your left mouse button.

Figure 5. Making component connections

Your component should now look like this:

92(92) © 2000
User Manual
BMS - Light

Version 1.0

Printed: 04-8-12 9.15


Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Table of contents
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2 Installing BMS – Light .................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.1 HW requirements................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Disclaimer.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
3 User interface................................................................................................................................................................. 4
3.1 Menu (top toolbar) options: ................................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Status bars in main window................................................................................................................................... 5
4 Download view.............................................................................................................................................................. 6
5 Get log view .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
5.1 Filtering constraints ............................................................................................................................................... 8
6 I/O status view............................................................................................................................................................... 9
7 Misc. view ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Anybus view........................................................................................................................................................................ 11
8 Spreader info view....................................................................................................................................................... 12
9 CANopen IO view....................................................................................................................................................... 13
10 Upload view............................................................................................................................................................. 14
11 Advanced................................................................................................................................................................. 15
11.1 CAN Tester.......................................................................................................................................................... 15
11.2 Boot Loader ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
11.3 Asserts ................................................................................................................................................................. 18
11.4 POM Loader ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
11.5 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
11.6 CANopen services ............................................................................................................................................... 20

2(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user
has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.

Installing BMS – Light

HW requirements
An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
At least 1Mb of free disk space.

Installation
Close any other applications running under Windows.
Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc)
Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

3(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

User interface

Menu (top toolbar) options:

Exit --- Terminates the application.

Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload]

Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2].


Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears.
The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.

Modem connection

Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232
link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node.
Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel.

About: shows the version of the BMS.

4(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Status bars in main window

1. Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel.


2. Status of current operation.
3. Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2).
4. Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations.
5. Status of serial cable connection.

Main window

5(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to
update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time.

1. Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node.
2. Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes
on the bus.
3. Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded.
4. Connected node (to PC).
5. Receiving node when distributing between nodes.
6. Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts.
7. Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution
between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).

6(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Get log view


This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log.

1. Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its’ pressed)
2. Get all messages in log.
3. If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4].
4. Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds.
5. Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log.
6. Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here.
7. Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected.
8. Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc.
9. Cancels current operation.
10. Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.

Get log view

7(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Filtering constraints
Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view.

Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table.
Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not
appear in the filtered table.

1. Message categories
2. Nodes that have reported messages.
3. Message codes for entire table

Filtering constraints

8(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

I/O status view


This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2.

1. Select node to view.


2. Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press
Write [4]
3. Current value/current overridden value of I/O.
4. Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if
values are to be forced on more than one node.
5. Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown).
6. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6].
7. Update interval for Auto read [6].
8. Cancels current operation.

Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:


Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be
checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.

1 3

4
5

6 7
8

I/O status view

9(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2.

1. Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed.
2. Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields.
3. Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields.
4. Get address key information from the node [5].
5. Destination of question.
6. Serial cable connection.
7. Cancels current operation.
8. Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program
version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Don’t care about the COM
versions.
9. Reboots the system.

Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the
same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer:
Key: 5
E-Stop: YES
Redundancy: YES
Module name: B1

8
2

7
6 5

10(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card.

1. Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the
value of that byte in binary format.
2. Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field
the value of that byte in binary format.
3. Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface.
4. Cancels current operation.
5. Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
6. Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
7. Select node where to Read [3] data from.

3
4

Anybus view

11(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Spreader info view


This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders.
Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM.

1. Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited.
2. Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1].
3. Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1].
4. Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value.
5. Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC.
6. Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM.
7. Cancels current operation.

Spreader info view

12(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

CANopen IO view
The CANopen view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the CANopen interface.
From this view its also possible to select individual or groups of I/O and override it/them.

1. Retrieves the CANopen I/Oconfiguration from the system


2. Updates the I/O status
3. Updates system with overridden I/O
4. Dropdown box for selection of which node to show I/O from
5. Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally
press SetIO [3]
6. Current value/current overridden value of I/O
7. I/O port identifier
8. Cancels current operation
9. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [2] with interval determined by the value of: [10]
10. Update interval for Auto [9]

Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:


Uncheck the corresponding I/O [5] and press SetIO [3]. All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.

2
3

CANopen IO view

13(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS 2.

14(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Advanced
These six sub views are mainly intended for Bromma’s R&D personnel only.

CAN Tester
This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as
Test. See the SCS 2 manual for information.

The main functionality is as follows:


Every node connected to the CAN network is tested.
Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate.
When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time.
The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list.

1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested.


2. Sets the duration time of each test.
3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results.
4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file.
5. Starts the test.
6. Sows status of the CAN test.
7. Closes dialog.
8. Result field showing which node that is tested.
9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used.
10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test.
11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test.
12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test.
13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test.
14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test.
15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test.
16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.

15(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

CAN Tester view

16(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Boot Loader
The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node.

1. Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19).


2. Downloads the selected file.
3. Progress bar showing percentage completed.
4. Cancels the download.
5. Closes dialog.

Boot Loader view

17(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system
events.

Asserts view

18(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

POM Loader
The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .

POM Loader view

Bluetooth
From this dialog it’s possible to configure and manage Bluetooth settings.
Note that the configuration possibilities only works with Bromma Conquip’s own Serial port adapter.

Bluetooth configurator view

19(20) © 2000
Document: Project: Project No

Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:

Research & Development

CANopen services
From this view it’s possible to perform read and write actions to CANopen slave nodes OD (Object Dictionary).
The read and write actions uses the SDO (Service Data Objects) concept of CANopen. For a more detailed description of
CANopen and it’s functionality it’s referred to more specific documentation.

1. Page containing the read functionality


2. Page containing the write functionality
3. Selection of CANopen node to read/write from/to. The SCS2 master node has address 127.
4. Index in OD. (Dec.)
5. Sub index in OD (Dec.)
6. Read value/ value that is to be written
7. Reads/writes value
8. Cancels current command
9. Closes the dialog
10. Status of current command

CANopen services view

20(20) © 2000
Rev 1.0 2004-12-08
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 2(55)

1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................... 3


1.2 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 4


2.2 T HE NODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5

3.1 BOOT PROGRAM....................................................................................................................................................... 6


3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 6

4.1 I/O LED’S ................................................................................................................................................................ 7


4.2 DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................................................... 7
4.2.1 Event categories.............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.2 Message format.............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages ......................................................................................................................9
4.3 GROUND CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................9
4.4 T HE X1 AND X3 CONNECTORS................................................................................................................................. 9
4.4.1 X1 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................10
4.4.2 X3 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................11
4.5 T HE X2 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................. 13
4.5.1 Main Supply .................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.2 CAN ............................................................................................................................................................. 13
4.5.3 Address Key .................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.4 Analogue Inputs ...........................................................................................................................................15
4.5.5 PWM Outputs............................................................................................................................................... 15
4.5.6 External Spreader Memory..........................................................................................................................15
4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI.............................................................................................................................................16
4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group ............................................................................................................................16
4.6 T HE X4 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................17
4.6.1 AnyBus ......................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs ....................................................................................................................18
4.7 T HE X5 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................19
4.7.1 RS-232.......................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.8 T HE REDUNDANCY FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................... 19
4.9 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS....................................................................................................................................... 20
4.9.1 Mapping of I/O ............................................................................................................................................20
4.10 SPREADER STOP ................................................................................................................................................21
4.11 FAULT FINDING TABLE ...................................................................................................................................... 22

5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 23


5.2 ABE....................................................................................................................................................................... 23
5.3 BMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 23

Manual 2  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 3(55)

6.1 DATA SHEET........................................................................................................................................................... 24


6.2 DIMENSIONS........................................................................................................................................................... 25

1 General

1.1 Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2 References
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/

1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations


Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details.
Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
SCS2 Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
Synchronous Serial Interface – sensor interface

1.4 Document layout


Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the .
Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the .
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the .
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the .
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.

Manual 3  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 4(55)

2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.

SCS2 includes the following features:

A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel.
Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable — no screening, no twisted pair.
A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net….)
Optional duty cycle input

2.1 General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:

Crane Node A device directly interfacing with the crane’s control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane
control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node A device that interfaces directly with the spreader’s sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.

Sensors and Switches Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.

The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the

1
For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual
Manual 4  2004 Bromma Conquip AB
File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 5(55)

number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.

2.2 The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also
have distributed functions such as regulators.

Manual 5  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 6(55)

3 Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1 Boot Program


When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.

The Boot program is responsible for


Initialising hardware
Checking that all the system Programs match.
Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
Performing a program downloads.

3.2 System program


After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC via the com-port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Handling in the event log
Reading and writing I/O

3.3 Spreader Program


The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.

Manual 6  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 7(55)

4 Hardware Overview
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.

Bus/AI RS232 Display &


I/O LED (X4) (X5) Power
X1- I/O X2- I/O, bus X3- I/O 1-48 LEDS
Connector & supply Connector
Connector

4.1 I/O LED’s


The I/O LED’s indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V)
of the module.

4.2 Display
The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1
second. The pages show the following:
Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>.
Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours
and MM the number of minutes.
Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain
text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section.

There are also four red LED’s in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different
levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LED’s are lit.

LED1 – 11V, FAIL


LED2 – 14V, WARNING 2
LED3 – 17V, WARNING
LED4 – 21V, OK

to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may
malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the “power on” indicator.

Manual 7  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 8(55)

There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error.

Type Prefix Example Note


Error E E102 Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are
turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with
an E.

Warning W W60 Warning shows information about the system status that is of high
importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will
begin with a W.

Information I I59 Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information


that could qualify to be displayed as information:
Program load status (how many percent are completed), version
verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will
begin with an I.

Information

The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format:

LTTTSSSS

L = Level type
TTT = Message type
SSSS = Sub type

Example:
E102 => Error in initialising the hardware
W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1.
I59 => Information that the system has started.

Level type
The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error

Message type
The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system
version and I/O error.
All these types are described in appendix A.

Sub type
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings
for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14
instead of just I/O error.
These sub types are described in appendix A.

Manual 8  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 9(55)

Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show
information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for error-
information and error-warning.
Priority in descending order:

Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the
warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.

4.3 Ground connection


The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the
node for this purpose.

4.4 The X1 and X3 connectors


There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44
are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a “Common” junction. See the connector part for more
detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.

Manual 9  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 10(55)

Description
I/O-1 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0 31
I/O-2 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_1 41
I/O-3 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_2 43
I/O-4 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_3 42
Common/Supply 1 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4 44

I/O-5 General purpose input or output / Locked_0 3


I/O-6 General purpose input or output / Locked_1 2
I/O-7 General purpose input or output / Locked_2 11
I/O-8 General purpose input or output / Locked_3 1
Common/Supply 2 Common junction for I/O-5 to I/O-8 21

I/O-9 General purpose input or output 26


I/O-10 General purpose input or output 16
I/O-11 General purpose input or output 6
I/O-12 General purpose input or output 7
Common/Supply 3 Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 8

I/O-13 General purpose input or output 4


I/O-14 General purpose input or output 5
I/O-15 General purpose input or output 25
I/O-16 General purpose input or output 15
Common/Supply 4 Common junction for I/O-13 to I/O-16 35

I/O-17 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0 10


I/O-18 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1 20
I/O-19 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0 30
I/O-20 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1 40
Common/Supply 5 Common junction for I/O-17 to I/O-20 9

I/O-212 General purpose input or output / Lock_left 46


I/O-22 General purpose input or output / Lock_right 47
I/O-23 General purpose input or output / Unlock_left 49
I/O-24 General purpose input or output / Unlock_right 48
Common/Supply 6 Common junction for I/O-21 to I/O-24 50

Manual 10  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 11(55)

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.

X1 - Pin number Link configuration X1 - Pin number Link configuration


12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
24 29
32 37
33 39
34 38
45 36

Name Description X3 pin number


I/O-25 General purpose input or output 21
I/O-26 General purpose input or output 31
I/O-27 General purpose input or output 41
I/O-28 General purpose input or output 42
Common/Supply 7 Common junction for I/O-25 to I/O-28 11

I/O-29 General purpose input or output 24


I/O-30 General purpose input or output 35
I/O-31 General purpose input or output 44
I/O-32 General purpose input or output 45
Common/Supply 8 Common junction for I/O-29 to I/O-32 43

I/O-33 General purpose input or output 5


I/O-34 General purpose input or output 4
I/O-35 General purpose input or output 3
I/O-36 General purpose input or output 2
Common/Supply 9 Common junction for I/O-33 to I/O-36 1

I/O-37 General purpose input or output 6


I/O-38 General purpose input or output 16
I/O-39 General purpose input or output 25
I/O-40 General purpose input or output 26

Manual 11  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 12(55)

Name Description X3 pin number


Common/Supply 10 Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40 15

I/O-41 General purpose input or output 49


I/O-42 General purpose input or output 48
I/O-43 General purpose input or output 47
I/O-44 General purpose input or output 46
Common/Supply 11 Common junction for I/O-41 to I/O-44 36

I/O-45 General purpose input or output 7


Common/Supply 12 Common junction for I/O-45 8

I/O-46 General purpose input or output 9


Common/Supply 13 Common junction for I/O-46 10

I/O-47 General purpose input or output 50


Common/Supply 14 Common junction for I/O-47 40

I/O-48 General purpose input or output 30


Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48 20

To make linking of common supplies easier the connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.

X3 - Pin number Link configuration X3 - Pin number Link configuration


12 17
13 18
14 19
22 27
23 28
32 29
33 37
34 38
39

Manual 12  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 13(55)

4.5 The X2 connector


The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.

24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single
pins. DC voltage can be applied either way.

Name Pin number in connector


24INA X2/42
24INA X2/43
24INB X2/45
24INB X2/44

The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second
net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors.

Name Pin number in connector


CAN High 1 X2/30
CAN Low 1 X2/40
CAN High 2 / Reserved3 X2/50
CAN Low 2 / Reserved3 X2/20
CAN GND 2/ Reserved3 X2/48

CAN channel is std CAN for CAN-Open installations


Manual 13  2004 Bromma Conquip AB
File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 14(55)

All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 – ID4 where pins being connected to the ground
pin corresponds to ”zeroes” and pins left unconnected are considered ”ones”.

Name Pin number in connector


ID4 X2/49
ID3 X2/39
ID2 X2/29
ID1 X2/19
ID0 X2/9
Ground X2/10

Configuration
Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different
roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling
Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8.

The address key setting is described in the following table:

Key input Node Spreader Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in Node number identifier
stop
name override of landing X2 connector when viewing Display and
pins Log
00000 Test 10,9,19,29,39,49
00001 A1 No No 10,19,29,39,49 8
00010 A2 No No 10,9,29,39,49 9
00011 A3 No No 10,29,39,49 10
00100 A4 No No 10,9,19,39,49 11
00101 B1 Yes Yes 10,19,39,49 0
00110 B1 Yes No 10,9,39,49 0
00111 B1 No Yes 10,39,49 0
01000 B1 No No 10,9,19,29,49 0
01001 B2 Yes Yes 10,19,29,49 1
01010 B2 Yes No 10,9,29,49 1
01011 B2 No Yes 10,29,49 1
01100 B2 No No 10,9,19,49 1
01101 B3 No No 10,19,49 2
01110 B4 No No 10,9,49 3
01111 B5 No No 10,49 4
10000 B6 No No 10,9,19,29,39 5
10001 B7 No No 10,19,29,39 6
10010 B8 No No 10,9,29,39 7
10011- Not
11110 Used
11111 Test None

Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key:
A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000.
A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001.
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.

Manual 14  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 15(55)

There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal
has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor
device.

Name Pin number in connector


Analogue in 1 X2/18
10Vref 1 X2/28
Signal ground 1 X2/8

Analogue in 2 X2/17
10Vref 2 X2/27
Signal ground 2 X2/7

There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two
connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop.

Name Pin number in connector


PWM out 1 X2/3
PWM in 1 X2/4

PWM out 2 X2/2


PWM in 2 X2/1

PWM out 3 X2/21


PWM in 3 X2/11

PWM out 4 X2/31


PWM in 4 X2/41

An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory
is connected as below.

Name Pin number in connector Cable


10V supply X2/36 Red
Serial data X2/16 Blue
Serial clock X2/26 Green
Signal ground X2/6 Black

Manual 15  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 16(55)

The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with
external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485
and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time.

When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used:


Name Pin number in connector
Channel A X2/38
Channel B X2/37

When used as SSI the following pins are used:


Name Pin number in connector
Clock+ X2/38
Clock- X2/37
Data+ X2/15
Data- X2/25

To make linking of common supplies easier the X2 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.

X2 - Pin number Link configuration


22
23
32
33
34

Manual 16  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 17(55)

4.6 The X4 Connector


The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS
232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin
headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the
relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a
circle to the left is number one in that header.

Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS
232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by
connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.

Front view of connectors inside node.

Manual 17  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 18(55)

The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN.

Name Pin number in connector


A-Line X4/2
B-Line X4/1
GND-BUS X4/3

These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2.
The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin
number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on
CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used
internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20
mA range.

Name Pin number in connector


GND X5/1
GND X5/2
Analogue Input 1 X5/5
Analogue Reference 10 V X5/3
Analogue Input 2 X5/4

Manual 18  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 19(55)

4.7 The X5 Connector

The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose.

Name Pin number in connector


TxD X5/1
RxD X5/2
RTS X5/5
CTS X5/3
GND X5/4

4.8 The Redundancy Function


For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the
operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.

C D
B

A E
The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself.
The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program).
The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised
correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation.
At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in
what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only
preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the
redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock
outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on
that particular node.
The outputs to the lock/unlock valves
The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked.

To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as
Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode
and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.

Manual 19  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 20(55)

4.9 Field bus Connections.


Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.

The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

4.9.1.1 Spreader diagnostic area.


Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

Manual 20  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 21(55)

4.9.1.2 System diagnostic area.


This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8 => Node ID
Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18 => sequential counter

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

4.10 Spreader Stop


A Spreader stop function can be used in the system.

This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the
spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2).

The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if
and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in
the spreader program.

Manual 21  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 22(55)

4.11 Fault Finding table

Node won’t start. No text appears in Measure the main supply. The voltage The green and all red LED’s in the
the display after power-on. should exceed 17V AC or DC. display should be lit.

BMS system can not communicate Probe TxD and RxD lines with Data lines should show square waves
with the node. oscilloscope while trying to between –10V to +10V relative to
communicate. GND pin.

The node can not communicate with Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.
the other nodes. CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.

Input signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module The LED should be lit when current
responds to sensor signal. flows through the module.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
Output signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module The LED should be lit when the circuit
responds to command. is closed.
Check the load for proper connection The load should be connected between
and grounding. the modules out pin and ground.
Check for broken fuse on the I/O
module.
Check the Common connection for The supply voltage depends on the
correct supply. type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.

The node stops at start-up with Node Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V This can indicate that the node has
Id displayed. represent ones and 0V represents wrong id strapped telling the node to
zeroes. The measures should indicate participate in the system with wrong
the expected id. role.

Analogue input signal appears to be Check the reference voltage relative to There should be exactly 10V
faulty. the GND. difference between them.
Check if the node chassis is properly This is very important in an AC driven
grounded to the spreader. system.

PWM output appears to be faulty. Check the load for errors.


Try another load.

Manual 22  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 23(55)

5 Software tools

5.1 Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS 2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.

5.2 ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3 BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual 23  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 24(55)

6 Miscellaneous

6.1 Data sheet

Parameter Note Min Max Unit

Operating voltage Pin X2 42-44 17 40 V AC/DC


Current consumption Depending on number and type of I/O modules 300 800 mA
Power monitoring Level and quality measurement of voltage.
Indicated via LED’s. (faults stored in log)
0
Temperature Operating temperature -40 +85 C
Internal temperature monitoring
IP67
EMC conformity In accordance with

Controller 32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz


Memory Program 1.4Mb
Log/NVRAM 128kb
External EEPROM 256byte
Time 1*realtime clock
PWM current output 4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected. 0 2,5 A
Analogue inputs 12 bit resolution voltage/current 0 10 V
10V reference voltage output
SSI serial 300 kHz
I/O 48 programmable Voltage depending on type of module used. 12 230 V AC/DC
Galvanic isolation. LED indication.
SC/OL protected 3A.
Scan time System scan time 50 ms
Node scan time 5 ms
Serial interfaces BCAN – Bromma CAN based bus
RS485 – Asynchronous for sensors etc.
RS232 – For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
8 character display for messages & information
Power level via LED’s
Event and error log
FB programming Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions

Manual 24  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 25(55)

6.2 Dimensions

Manual 25  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 26(55)

7 Appendix A (Error messages)


The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.

Nu level Description of code Description of sub code Consequence Hints


m.l
cod
e
0
1 WARNING Failed reading temperature .
2 spare 0 .
3 spare 1 .
4 spare 2 .
5 spare 3 .
6 ERROR Two different PCs' trying to Id of one of the node System is brought into Ensure that only
download to the system connected to the PC failsafe mode. one PC is
downloading
7 spare 4 .
8 spare 5 .
9 spare 6 .
10 spare 7 .
11 spare 8 .
12 ERROR Program memory failure, HW . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fault
13 ERROR No response from slave when . System is brought into Ensure that all
initialising system failsafe mode. slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
14 ERROR Boot sequence failed . System is brought into Restart system
failsafe mode.
15 spare 9 .
16 spare 10 .
17 spare 11 .
18 spare 12 .
19 spare 13 .
20 ERROR Downloading error, connection . System is brought into reload program
broken failsafe mode.
21 spare 14 .
22 ERROR Memory collides when . System is brought into recompile and
downloading program failsafe mode. download
program again
23 spare 15 .

Manual 26  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 27(55)

24 spare 16 .
25 spare 17 .
26 spare 18 .
27 spare 19 .
28 WARNING No data in program/system . System cannot start Contact Bromma
memory
29 spare 20 .
30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt .
31 ERROR HW fault on memory . System is brought into Contact Bromma
failsafe mode. if problem
persists
32 spare 21 .
33 spare 22 .
34 ERROR System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.
35 ERROR System failed in reading . System is brought into reload and
spreader program from memory failsafe mode. restart
36 ERROR No spreader program residing in . System is brought into download
memory failsafe mode. program
37 ERROR System failed to run spreader . System is brought into reload proram
program failsafe mode.
38 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
39 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
40 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
41 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader.
instances failed failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
42 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader
instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

Manual 27  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 28(55)

43 ERROR Spreader program object . System is brought into Check spreader


instances failed failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
44 WARNING I/O message lost .
45 ERROR Memory failure . System is brought into Restart system.
failsafe mode. If problems
persist contact
Bromma
46 spare 23 .
47 spare 24 .
48 spare 25 .
49 spare 26 .
50 ERROR Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has System is brought into restart
generated the error failsafe mode.
51 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

52 ERROR System initialising error when The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuring nodes I/O generated the error failsafe mode.
53 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

54 spare 27
55 ERROR Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has System is brought into restart
configuration from the same generated the error failsafe mode.
node when initialising system

56 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check


requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
57 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check
requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
58 ERROR No answer when master . System is brought into check
requesting configuration failsafe mode. connections
information during intitialisation between nodes.
Restart
59 INFO System started .
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor . Message stored in log and check wiring,
inputs active during system start displayed on Spreader sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons

Manual 28  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 29(55)

61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all locked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking. ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
Unlocked signal has not been which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or
received after output to valve warning wiring or
mechanical
reasons
65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
without command/output when warning and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
received after first landed and which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
timeout. warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
released when the other sensors which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning and sensor
out adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No . Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within displays/stores message damaged sensors
timeout limit after output has and sensor
been activated adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. ID no. of the sensor Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping missing which displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached generated the warning and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons

Manual 29  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 30(55)

70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost Message stored in log and displayed on
position sensor is lost without an sensor Spreader
output.

71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors displayed on Spreader damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR Duplicate answers from one The node ID which has System is brought into restart (check
node during boot verification generated the error failsafe mode. address keying)
73 ERROR Wrong boot version in a node The node ID which has System is brought into contact Bromma
generated the error failsafe mode.
74 ERROR No answer when master The node ID which has System is brought into restart
requesting boot version. generated the error failsafe mode.
75 spare 28
76 spare 29
77 spare 30
78 spare 31 .
79 spare 32 .
80 ERROR Wrong node answered request The node ID which has System is brought into restart
from master to check if pc was generated the error failsafe mode.
connected
81 ERROR No answer after master request The node ID which has System is brought into restart, check
to check PC port (RS232) generated the error failsafe mode. connections
82 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into retry
failsafe mode.
83 ERROR Unable to download program . System is brought into Check spreader
(checksum failure) failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be read
85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time .
couldn't be set
86 INFO minimum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
87 INFO maximum system CPU cycle time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
time. Periodically reported every Spreader
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
88 INFO average system CPU cycle time. time in ms Message stored in log and displayed on
Periodically reported every half Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after

Manual 30  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 31(55)

reporting.

89 spare 33 .
90 INFO The number of control loops The number of the Message stored in log and displayed on
exceeding 100ms for th last half counter Spreader
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
91 spare 34 .
92 spare 35 .
93 spare 36 .
94 ERROR No operative system in Node . Systems fails to start contact Bromma
95 ERROR Duplicate answer on The node ID which has System is brought into check adress key
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error failsafe mode.
96 ERROR No answer on Master request for . System is brought into check adress key
"Spreader stop" configuration failsafe mode.
97 INFO Spreader stop has been 0= activated Message stored in log and displayed on
activated/deactivated 1=deactivated Spreader

98 spare 37 .
99 spare 38 .
100 ERROR Spreader program fault . System is brought into
recompile and
failsafe mode. reload spreader
program
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer Spreader

102 ERROR System failed to initialise HW . System shutdown contact Bromma


103 spare 39 .
104 spare 40 .
105 ERROR Onboard NV RAM failed . System is brought into check
memory test failsafe mode. battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma

106 spare 41 .
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

Manual 31  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 32(55)

109 ERROR Battery voltage too low Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check battery
displayed on Spreader

110 ERROR The System failed to lock th I/O . System is brought into restart
on a node during system init. failsafe mode.
111 spare 42
112 spare 43 .
113 spare 44 .
114 INFO System is shutting down .
115 INFO System shutdown has been .
completed
116 spare 45 .
117 spare 46 .
118 INFO Landed override has been .
activated
119 INFO Landed override has been .
deactivated
120 spare 47 .
121 spare 48 .
122 spare 49 .
123 spare 50 .
124 spare 51 .
125 spare 52 .
126 spare 53 .
127 spare 54 .
128 spare 55 .
129 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
130 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
131 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma

Manual 32  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 33(55)

132 spare 56 .
133 spare 57 .
134 spare 58 .
135 spare 59 .
136 ERROR Spreader program fault or load . System is brought into check and
file has been korrupted failsafe mode. recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
137 spare 60 .
138 spare 61 .
139 spare 62 .
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message The ID type of the Message stored in log and displayed on
received message Spreader

141 INFO CAN messages missed. The count of the Message stored in log and displayed on
Cyclically reported. missed messages Spreader

142 ERROR Two nodes within the system The ID which is System is brought into check and
have the same ID/adress duplicate failsafe mode. correct the
adress key
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
high displayed on Spreader

144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

146 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

147 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Manual 33  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 34(55)

148 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

149 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

150 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

151 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

152 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

153 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

154 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

155 WARNING User defined Warning. The . Message stored in log and Check specific
user/programmer defines what displayed on Spreader project.
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

156 spare 63 .
157 spare 64 .
158 spare 65 .
159 spare 66 .
160 spare 67 .
161 WARNING CAN error . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

Manual 34  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 35(55)

162 WARNING RS232 error . Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

164 ERROR Power monitor P1 = sensor . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

166 ERROR Power monitor P2 = internal . System is taken down check supplies
logic supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and check supplies
supply voltage. Warning 1 = displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 21V

168 ERROR Power monitor P3 = PWM . System is taken down check supplies
supply voltage. ERROR = into idle mode. Ie if the
Voltage below permissive system voltage comes up
voltage of system. again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port: Message stored in log and check supplies
I/O port Digital=0+port_no, displayed on Spreader
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.

170 spare 68 .
171 spare 69 .
172 spare 70 .
173 spare 71 .

Manual 35  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 36(55)

174 ERROR No answer when on general . Message stored in log and displayed on
information request between Spreader
nodes.

175 INFO TWL - twistlock lock command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

176 INFO TWL - twistlock unlock . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader

177 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
locked Spreader

178 INFO TWL - twistlock has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
unlocked Spreader

179 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Expand command received Spreader

180 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader

181 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a speceific requested Spreader
position has been received

182 INFO TELESCOPE - prox. type. The The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
desired position has been requested Spreader
reached

183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position The telescopic motion is check sensor,
The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time stopped until a new pressure,mechan
position within time limit limit. command is given. ics. If necessary
1 = telescope has not Message stored in log and calibrate system.
moved more than 1 cm displayed on Spreader
during 3 seconds.

184 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
expand command received Spreader

185 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Retract command received Spreader

Manual 36  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 37(55)

186 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
Command to go to a specific requested Spreader
position received

187 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
The desired position reached requested Spreader

188 INFO The year has been set current value (year) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

189 INFO The month has been set current value (month) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

190 INFO The day/date has been set current value (date) Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

191 INFO The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour) Message stored in log and displayed on
set Spreader

192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for The ID of the node Message stored in log and check
10s which doesn't have displayed on Spreader connections
contact

193 ERROR Message reported during boot. . restart (check


Unknown role address keying)
194 INFO Information request (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

195 INFO Download request active . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

196 INFO Information request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

197 INFO set time request received . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

198 INFO Boot version request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

199 spare 72 .

Manual 37  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 38(55)

200 INFO Download flag request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

201 spare 73 .
202 spare 74 .
203 spare 75 .
204 spare 76 .
205 INFO Check flash memory request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received. (system boot Spreader
functionality)

206 INFO Restart node request received. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

207 INFO System start init. (system boot . Message stored in log and displayed on
functionality) Spreader

208 INFO System look for downloadflag. . Message stored in log and displayed on
(system boot functionality) Spreader

209 INFO Send datablock request. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

210 INFO Received datablock. (system . Message stored in log and displayed on
boot functionality) Spreader

211 INFO Download in progress percentage of progress shown on Spreader display


downloaded data
212 INFO copy serial information to flash . Message stored in log and displayed on
memory Spreader

213 spare 77 .
214 spare 78 .
215 ERROR No answer when waiting for . System is brought into failsafe mode.
present nodes response
216 INFO Inforamtion on present nodes . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader

217 ERROR Download timeout . System is brought into reload


failsafe mode.
218 spare 79 .

Manual 38  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 39(55)

219 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.


answers from system members
during boot
220 ERROR The size of received data is to . System is brought into failsafe mode.
large. Boot message
221 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
222 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
223 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
224 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
225 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
226 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
227 spare 80 .
228 ERROR No answers or inconsistent . System is brought into failsafe mode.
answers from system members
during boot
229 INFO Spreader error and event log has . Message stored in log and displayed on
been cleared Spreader

230 ERROR Failed to set up spreader destination of error System is brought into Check spreader
program correctly failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
231 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
232 ERROR Spreader program download . System is brought into Check spreader
error failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
233 INFO Power monitor P1 = sensor . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

234 INFO Power monitor P2 = internal . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

Manual 39  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 40(55)

235 INFO Power monitor P3 = PWM . Message stored in log and displayed on
supply voltage. OK Spreader

236 INFO Reboot (restart) request sent . Message stored in log and displayed on
from master to slaves. Happens Spreader
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
237 INFO System has been taken down to . Message stored in log and displayed on
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake Spreader
up.

238 Spare 81 .
239 INFO System failed to cancel . Message stored in log and displayed on
shutdown process Spreader

240 INFO No answer when attempting to . Message stored in log and displayed on
cancel shutdown process Spreader

241 INFO System received timeout when . Message stored in log and displayed on
attempting to cancel shutdown Spreader
process

242 INFO System shutdown aborted . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

243 spare 82 .
244 INFO TWL - The spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
landed Spreader

245 INFO TWL - The Spreader has been . Message stored in log and displayed on
totally lifted (not landed) Spreader

246 INFO FLIPPER - flipper up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

247 INFO FLIPPER - flipper down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command received Spreader

248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V

Manual 40  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 41(55)

249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage <17V

250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM . AI can start to flicker. Message stored in
supply voltage. Warning 2 = log and displayed on Spreader
Voltage < 17V

251 ERROR System failed to initialise fielbus . System is brought into failsafe mode.
interface
252 ERROR Duplicate answers when setting . System is brought into failsafe mode.
up fieldbus interface
253 ERROR No answer when configuring . System is brought into failsafe mode.
fieldbus interface
254 WARNING System failed in locking .
fieldbus interface
255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their upper failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors

256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' upper position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
within time limit nics/sensors

258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right . Twin down sequence check
timed out when expanding to stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
their attach position. Failed to Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors
reach switch within time limit position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors

Manual 41  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 42(55)

261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . Message stored in log and check
to reach its' lower position displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
(connect) within time limit nics/sensors

262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
failed to get to their lower failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
position within time limit nics/sensors

263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
unexpectedly. (not due to failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
output) nics/sensors

264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor ID of the twin box Message stored in log and check
received when twinboxes are failing displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
down nics/sensors

265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down . Message stored in log and check
sensor lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor . Message stored in log and check
lost unexpectedly. displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

269 ERROR System failed to init. RS485 Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
failsafe mode. Bromma
270 ERROR Duplicate answers in system Node ID System is brought into restart / contact
when setting up RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
271 ERROR System timed out when trying to . System is brought into restart / contact
configure RS485 failsafe mode. Bromma
272 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Message stored in log and displayed on
Teach in command received Spreader

273 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - expand . Message stored in log and displayed on


command received Spreader

274 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - retract . Message stored in log and displayed on


command received Spreader

Manual 42  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 43(55)

275 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - left . Message stored in log and displayed on


console reached zero gap Spreader
position

276 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - right . Message stored in log and displayed on


console reached zero gap Spreader
position

277 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on


expand in motion Spreader

278 INFO TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs . Message stored in log and displayed on


retract in motion Spreader

279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't . motion is stopped. check


reached an endstop when in Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
motion within time limit displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

280 spare 83 .
281 INFO TWINMPS - teaching a pre- The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
defined position teached Spreader

282 INFO TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
a pre-defined position has been requested Spreader
received

283 INFO TWINMPS - A command to . Message stored in log and displayed on


store a new value for a log Spreader
position has been received

284 INFO TWINMPS - A command to The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
return to a log position has been requested Spreader
received

285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs . Motion is stopped. check


haven't reached their requested Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
position within time limit. displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

286 INFO TWIN195 - twin up command . Message stored in log and displayed on
has been received Spreader

287 INFO TWIN195 - twin down . Message stored in log and displayed on
command has been received Spreader

Manual 43  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 44(55)

288 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their upper position Spreader

289 INFO TWIN195 - twin boxes have . Message stored in log and displayed on
reached their lower position Spreader

290 INFO TTDS - override request . Message stored in log and displayed on
received Spreader

291 INFO TTDS - override request ended . Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial . Message stored in log and displayed on
port info over CAN bus Spreader

293 WARNING No answer when transferring . Message stored in log and displayed on
serial port info over Can bus Spreader

294 ERROR Failed to communicate with . System is brought


RS485 into failsafe mode.

295 spare 84 .
296 spare 85 .
297 spare 86 .
298 ERROR Failed reading spreader System is brought into Check spreader
program. failsafe mode. program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
299 spare 87
300 spare 88
301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader

302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as Depending on type of Message stored in log and displayed on
intended sensor/device Spreader

303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup Node ID


304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock
AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup

306 INFO Spreader properties Number of containers Message stored in log and

Manual 44  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 45(55)

loaded/unloaded displayed on Spreader


307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup

311 ERROR Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM

312 WARNING Spreader properties


313 WARNING Spreader properties
314 WARNING Spreader properties
315 WARNING Spreader properties
316 WARNING Spreader properties
317 WARNING Spreader properties
318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM
set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
323 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node

324 INFO RS485 status ok


325 INFO Gravity point to centre
command
326 INFO Gravity point to left side
command
327 INFO Gravity point to right side
command
328 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
centre position
329 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
left end stop
330 INFO Gravity point has reached the .
right endstop
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap .
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.

Manual 45  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 46(55)

332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has .


wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO Added value to NVRAM .
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding digital I/O
336 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding analogue I/O
337 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding encoder data
338 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding AnyBus message
339 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding RS485 data
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code
341 ERROR Error when trying to dowload .
program
342 ERROR Node is missing on the bus node that is missing
during system start.
343 ERROR Inclination sensor initialisation node that failed to initialise the sensor
error
344 ERROR Timeout when trying to node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor
345 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding inclination sensor
346 INFO Node bus communication ok. .
BCAN ok
347 INFO BCAN bus status warning. .
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .
349 ERROR AnyBus Spreader/systems node from which an answer is expected
diagnostic area failed to set up.
350 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
351 ERROR AnyBus Assert diagnostic area node from which an answer is expected
failed to set up
352 ERROR Timeout when trying to set up
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.

Manual 46  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 47(55)

353 INFO Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value

354 INFO AnyBus slave card plugged in


node ID holding the
card
355 INFO AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing node ID of the node missing the card

357 INFO AnyBus Input data area size size of data area (bytes)
358 INFO AnyBus output data area size size of data area (bytes)
359 ERROR Hardware initialisation failed psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
(system prog.)

360 ERROR NVRAM full. No space left for .


Storage
361 ERROR NVRAM checksum Error .
362 ERROR OS code. Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
363 ERROR OS subcode.Operating system code from OS call Bromma
fatal error
364 ERROR OS extra.Operating system fatal code from OS call Bromma
error
365 ERROR Local regulator (PID) failed. node ID that failed to restart
initialise the regulator
366 ERROR Local regulator (PID) timeout . retstart
367 ERROR Error in interpreting the spreader . Check versions
program. Parameter mismatch of system and
between system and ABE file. ABE.

368 ERROR Error in recognising a . Check versions


component downloaded with the of system and
spreader program ABE.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached .
the requested position within
time limit.
370 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR Error in locking regulator setup .

372 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.

373 INFO The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing

Manual 47  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 48(55)

to with the actual value


set in the Spreader info.

374 INFO The time of day (minute) has Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on
been set Spreader

375 INFO Received a change bitrate Requested bitrate


request. Boot message.

376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on


values from left hook Spreader

377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor Message stored in log and displayed on


values from right hook Spreader

378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(start sequence) handle start sequence. Spreader

379 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(download sequence) download. Spreader

380 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
(finish sequence) handle finish sequence. Spreader

381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader

382 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
disable outputs. Spreader

383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild. node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader

384 WARNING No answer when attempting to Message stored in log and displayed on
enabeling outputs. Spreader

385 INFO AutoTuner stored in NVRAM Regulator index. Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

Manual 48  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 49(55)

386 INFO Tandem - Teaching a pre- The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
defined position teached Spreader

387 INFO Tandem - A command to store a Message stored in log and displayed on
new value for a log position has Spreader
been received

388 INFO Tandem - command to go to a The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
pre-defined position has been requested Spreader
received

389 INFO Tandem - A command to return The ID of the position Message stored in log and displayed on
to a log position has been requested Spreader
received

390 WARNING Tandem - Cylinder position has The ID of the cylinder Message stored in log and displayed on
changed more than allowed. Spreader

391 INFO Tandem – Both landside and Message stored in log and displayed on
waterside spreaders enabled Spreader

392 INFO Tandem – Landside spreader Message stored in log and displayed on
enabled Spreader

393 INFO Tandem – Waterside spreader Message stored in log and displayed on
enabled Spreader

394 INFO TandemPush – A push Message stored in log and displayed on


command received Spreader

395 INFO TandemPush – Inner position Message stored in log and displayed on
reached. Spreader

396 INFO TELESCOPE – Impact detected Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

397 INFO TELESCOPE – Telescope is Message stored in log and displayed on


autocorrecting Spreader

398 WARNING TELESCOPE – Sensor value is Message stored in log and displayed on
out of range Spreader

Manual 49  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 50(55)

399 INFO TELESCOPE – Bumped out of Message stored in log and displayed on
signal window Spreader

400 INFO TWL – TTDS active Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

401 WARNING TWL – Lock attempt with Message stored in log and displayed on
TTDS active Spreader

402 INFO Digital I/O configured on an Node id on where I/O Message stored in log and displayed on
AnybusGateway configured Spreader

403 INFO Analogue I/O configured on an Node id on where I/O Message stored in log and displayed on
AnybusGateway configured Spreader

404 INFO PWM configured on an Node id on where I/O Message stored in log and displayed on
AnybusGateway configured Spreader

405 INFO ASC – Antisway sytem active Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

406 INFO ASC – Antisway sytem ready Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

407 INFO ASC – Antisway sytem failed Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreaderi

408 spare 88

409 ERROR OS extra 2.Operating system code from OS call Bromma


fatal error

410 INFO Current hardware version HW type Type of hardware version.


5 = SCS2 revision
4 = SCS2
6 = Anybus gateway
411 WARNING Strange parameter saved in Parameter No. The PID component found a strange
NVRAM. (AutoTuner) parameter saved in NVRAM. The PID
component uses the ABE parameters
instead.

Manual 50  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 51(55)

412 WARNING Auto Tuner – Finished but failed Parameter No. Some parameters could not be calculated.
to calculate some parameters Check sensors etc.

413 ERROR CANopen – Failed to initialize


the software.

414 ERROR CANopen – Failed to configure Check spreader program


PDO

415 ERROR CANopen - Error in locking


CANopen setup

416 INFO CANopen – Node removed from Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
heartbeat list Spreader

417 INFO CANopen – New node added to Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
heart beat list Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

418 INFO CANopen – Boot message Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
received from node Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

419 INFO CANopen – Node stopped Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

420 INFO CANopen – Node in operational Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
state Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

421 INFO CANopen – Node in Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
preoperational state Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

422 WARNING CANopen – Heartbeat failed on Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
node Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

423 ERROR CANopen – To many slaves in Message stored in log and displayed on
use Spreader. Check spreader program.

424 ERROR CANopen – Failed to configure Message stored in log and displayed on
SDO Spreader. Check spreader program.

Manual 51  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 52(55)

425 WARNING CANopen – Failed to send SDO Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. Check spreader program.

426 WARNING CANopen – Bus off occured Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader.

427 ERROR CANopen – Failed to change the Message stored in log and displayed on
bitrate on CAN interface Spreader.

428 Spare 89

429 Spare 90

430 Spare 91

431 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 1 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
432 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 2 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
433 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 3 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
434 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 4 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
435 WARNING CANopen – Emergency object Contents of byte Message stored in log and displayed on
additional byte 5 Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
436 INFO CANopen – Slave OK Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
437 WARNING CANopen – Generic error Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual

Manual 52  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 53(55)

438 WARNING CANopen – Current Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

439 WARNING CANopen – Current, device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
input side Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

440 WARNING CANopen – Current, inside Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
device Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

441 WARNING CANopen – Current, device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
output side Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

442 WARNING CANopen - Voltage Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

443 WARNING CANopen – Mains voltage Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

444 WARNING CANopen - Voltage inside Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

445 WARNING CANopen – Voltage output Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

446 WARNING CANopen - Temperature Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

447 WARNING CANopen – Temperature Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
ambient Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

448 WARNING CANopen – Temperature device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

449 WARNING CANopen – Hardware device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

450 WARNING CANopen – Software device Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

Manual 53  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 54(55)

451 WARNING CANopen – Software inside Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

452 WARNING CANopen – software user Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

453 WARNING CANopen – Data set Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

454 WARNING CANopen – Additional module Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

455 WARNING CANopen - Monitoring Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

456 WARNING CANopen – CAN overrun Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

457 WARNING CANopen – CAN error passive Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

458 WARNING CANopen – Lifeguard or Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
heartbeat Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

459 WARNING CANopen – Recover from bus Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
off Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

460 WARNING CANopen - Transmit COB id Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

461 WARNING CANopen – General Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
communication Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

462 WARNING CANopen – General protocol Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

463 WARNING CANopen – PDO not processed Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

Manual 54  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2004-12-08 13:51 11 55(55)

464 WARNING CANopen – PDO length Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
exceeded Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

465 WARNING CANopen – External error Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

466 WARNING CANopen – Additional Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
functions Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

467 WARNING CANopen – Device specific Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
468 WARNING CANopen – Node missing Node number Check CAN connections and spreader
program.

469 INFO CANopen – Node id changed Changed to node Message stored in log and displayed on
number Spreader.

470 WARNING CANopen – Node id chage Node number Message stored in log and displayed on
failed Spreader.

471 WARNING TTDS – No sensors - Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Manual 55  2004 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS_1 Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Rev 1.0 05-03-08
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 2(13)

1 General ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................ 3
2 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 THE NODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5
3 Software........................................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 BOOT PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 6
4 Hardware Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 BCAN - STATUS LEDS ........................................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 THE ANY BUS CARD ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.3 POWER CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.4 BCAN CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.5 NODE ADDRESS KEY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................ 7
4.6 SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................................ 7
4.7 GROUND CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.8 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS. ....................................................................................................................................... 8
4.8.1 Mapping of I/O .............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.9 FAULT F INDING TABLE........................................................................................................................................... 10
5 Software tools............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.2 ABE....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
5.3 BMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
6 Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
6.1 DATA SHEET........................................................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
7 Appendix A (Error messages)................................................................................................................................... 13

Manual 2 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 3(13)

1 General

1.1 Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the those installing and using the Bromma SCS2 Anybus
Gateway. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2 Dictionary and abbreviations


Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic.
Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS 2.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
SCS2 Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
A node that can be used in the Spreader Control System generation 2.

1.3 Document layout


Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.
Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning (see main SCS2 manual for details).

Manual 3 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 4(13)

2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.

2.1 General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:

Crane Node A device directly interfacing with the crane’s control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane
control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node A device that interfaces directly with the spreader’s sensorsand actuators.
One of the Spreader nodes normally acts as Master.
Sensors and Switches Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
The system is divided into several hardware blocks called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
number of I/O needed.

The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:

0 is the master called B1


1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Manual 4 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 5(13)

Crane PLC
Crane field bus

Anybus Gateway A1

CAN network (BCAN) SCS2

I/O B1 Master B2 Slave ... B8 Slave

Spreader

Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.

2.2 The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master.

3 Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1 Boot Program


When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.

The Boot program is responsible for


Initialising hardware
Verifying that all system versions match.
Performing a program download

3.2 System program


After the Boot program is finished, the System will execute until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Interpreting the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC-connection via the RS232 port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Logging events in the event log
Reading input signals and writing output signals

Manual 5 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 6(13)

3.3 Spreader Program


The Spreader Program is the specific application program that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see
chapter 5.2 for a brief description.

4 Hardware Overview
Figure2 is a SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. The different parts are explained in the
following chapter. This view shows a Profibus card, this can naturally be exchanged for any other available fieldbus.

AnyBus
(Profibus) card
Status LEDs
status LEDS

AnyBus Power connector


(Profibus) card
address BCAN connector
selectors
AnyBus
(Profibus) card Node address key
terminator switches
switch
Serial port connector
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
fieldbus
connector

Figure 2. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card.

4.1 BCAN - Status LEDs


There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error
status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the communication
interface is not working as inteded.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when configured and operating normaly.
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

4.2 The Any bus card


For details regarding the specific field bus card connection, termination, addressing and status LED’s, please see the
separate manual for that specific type of card.

4.3 Power connector


The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2-pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).

Name Description Pin number


VCC 10 to 28 V DC 1
GND Ground 2

Manual 6 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 7(13)

4.4 BCAN connector


The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81).

Name Description Pin number


CAN H CAN high 1
CAN L CAN low 2
CAN GND CAN ground, not required by BCAN 3

4.5 Node address key switches


There are five switches selecting node address, where the DIP switch 1 corresponds to LSB.
The nodes are addressed according to the following table:

DIP setting Node Spreader Redundancy block and override


stop
0=off, 1=on name of landing pins
00000 Test
00001 A1 No No
00010 A2 No No
00011 A3 No No
00100 A4 No No
00101 B1 Yes Yes
00110 B1 Yes No
00111 B1 No Yes
01000 B1 No No
01001 B2 Yes Yes
01010 B2 Yes No
01011 B2 No Yes
01100 B2 No No
01101 B3 No No
01110 B4 No No
01111 B5 No No
10000 B6 No No
10001 B7 No No
10010 B8 No No
10011-11110 Not Used
11111 Test

4.6 Serial port connector


The serial port connector is a standard DSUB 9-PIN female connector. A pin-to-pin cable is needed when connecting the
SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port.

Name Description Pin number


Tx Transmitted data RS-232 2
Rx Received data RS-232 3
Signal GND Ground 5
CTS Clear to send RS-232 7
RTS Request to send RS-232 8
Not connected Not connected 1, 4, 6, 9

4.7 Ground connection


2
The SCS Anybus Gateway chassis must be properly connected to protective earth, for example by mounting the unit on a
grounded DIN rail.

Manual 7 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 8(13)

4.8 Field bus Connections.


By using the AnyBus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be
used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card
translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change
between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a
specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.

The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane. Hence the crane PLC and the AnyBus card must have corresponding
addresses and the nymber of bytes configured for input/output data have to be the same on both sides of the
communication link i.e. the crane PLC and the SCS 2.

4.8.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT IN
Byte 0-63 Byte 0-63
Project Project
specific specific
outputs inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

4.8.1.1 Spreader diagnostic area.


Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)

4.8.1.2 System diagnostic area.


This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip AB’s R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its’ equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8 => Node ID
Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18 => sequential counter

Manual 8 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 9(13)

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Manual 9 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 10(13)

4.9 Fault Finding table


Symptom What to do Comment

Power Supply
The node won’t start. The power LED Measure the main supply. The voltage The power LED should be on.
is off. should exceed 10V DC and be less
than 30V DC.

RS-232
BMS system can not communicate Probe TxD and RxD lines with Data lines should show square waves
with the node. oscilloscope while trying to between –10V to +10V relative to
communicate. Ensure that connection GND pin.
cables aren’t damaged.

CAN
The node can not communicate with Probe bus lines with oscilloscope. Check that CAN high and CAN low
the other nodes. CAN high should show square waves are not mixed up.
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.

Node ID
The unit stops at start-up. Check selected node ID. This can indicate that the node has
wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.

5 Software tools

5.1 Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.

5.2 ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3 BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual 10 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 11(13)

6 Miscellaneous

6.1 Data sheet

Parameter Note Min Max Unit

Operating voltage Power connector 10 28 V DC


Current consumption Operating voltage 24 V DC 50 200 mA
0
Temperature Operating temperature -20 +85 C
EMC conformity In accordance with 






2
Controller 32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz
Memory Program 1.4Mb
Log 128kb
Scan time System scan time 50 ms
Node scan time 5 ms
Serial interfaces BCAN – Bromma CAN based bus
RS232 – For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
Event and error log
FB programming Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
Note 2) For compliance with EN 61000-6-2 the power cable and the serial port cable have to be limited to 10 meters in
length

Manual 11 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 12(13)

6.2 Dimensions

Figure 3. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. All dimensions are in mm.

Manual 12 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document: Project: Project No
2
Manual SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by: Date: Version: Page:
Andy Lewis 2005-03-08 10:41 11 13(13)

7 Appendix A (Error messages)


The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). See main system manual for list of codes.

Manual 13 2005 Bromma Conquip AB


File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT




TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE



IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK





 

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED

 
 
 

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT

 
 
 

TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK

 
 

  
 

  
 
 

 

FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE

 
 

  
 

 



 
 
 
 


 
 
 
 
 


 


 


 
 


 






 
  

  
  

   
  
   
 
  
  
 
  

 

 


Вам также может понравиться